FAX-L800
User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Laser Safety
Laser radiation could be harzardous to the human body. For this reason, laser
radiation emitted inside this fax is hermetically sealed within the protective
housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by the user,
no radiation can leak from the machine.
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this User’s Guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This label is attached to the laser scanner unit inside the fax and is not in a user
access area.
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when open.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CAUTION - INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION - RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D’OUVERTURE.
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
VORSICHT
-
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
ATTENZIONE - RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBLE IN CASO DI APERTURA.
EVITARE L’ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO.
PRECAUCION - RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE.
EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO.
VARO!
- AAVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE
LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
VARNING! - OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.
ADVARSEL! - USYNLIG LASER STRÅLING, NÅR DENNE ER ÅBEN.
UNDGÅ BESTRÅLING.
ADVARSEL - USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING, NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES.
UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
RS5-8169
The label below is attached on the rear side of the fax.
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1
LASER KLASSE 1
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1
EN60825:1991
Preface
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Welcome! .................................................................................................................... 1-1
Main Features .............................................................................................................. 1-2
Setting Up ................................................................................................................... 2-1
How to Use This Guide ............................................................................................. 2-2
Where to Set Up the Fax ........................................................................................... 2-3
Space Around the Fax ................................................................................................ 2-5
Power Requirements .................................................................................................. 2-6
General Precautions ................................................................................................... 2-7
Unpacking: Have You Got Everything? .................................................................. 2-9
Parts of the Fax .......................................................................................................... 2-11
Front View ...................................................................................................... 2-11
Rear View ....................................................................................................... 2-12
Handset (option) ........................................................................................... 2-12
Removing the Shipping Material ............................................................................ 2-13
Removing the Shipping Tape ....................................................................... 2-13
Removing the Spacers Inside the Fax Unit ................................................ 2-13
Removing the Styrofoam Sheet from the ADF ........................................ 2-14
Removing the Orange Lock Plate from the Front Paper Cassette ......... 2-15
Removing the Protective Sheets .................................................................. 2-16
Assembling the Fax ................................................................................................... 2-17
Installing the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................... 2-17
Attaching Trays .............................................................................................. 2-20
Connecting the Handset (an option) .......................................................... 2-20
Connecting the Telephone Line .................................................................. 2-21
Connecting an Extension Phone ................................................................. 2-22
Loading Paper and Installing the Paper Cassettes .................................... 2-22
Loading Paper in the Side Paper Cassette ...................................... 2-23
Loading Paper in the Front Paper Cassette ................................... 2-25
Turning on the Power .................................................................................... 2-27
Chapter 3
Getting Started .......................................................................................................... 3-1
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels closed) ....................................................... 3-2
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels open) ......................................................... 3-4
Using the Menus and Buttons ................................................................................... 3-5
General Guidelines for Registering Information ........................................ 3-5
Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 3-5
To Open a Menu and Select an Item ................................................. 3-6
To Return to the Previous Level ........................................................ 3-6
To Return to Standby Immediately ................................................... 3-6
Entering Names for Registration .................................................................. 3-7
To Correct a Mistake ........................................................................... 3-8
Menu Button Summary Table ........................................................................ 3-8
iv
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking and Setting the Telephone Line ............................................................. 3-10
Registering Required Sender Information ............................................................ 3-11
What is Sender Information? ....................................................................... 3-12
Registering the Sender Information ....................................................................... 3-13
Registering Sender Names ....................................................................................... 3-17
Registering a Sender Name .......................................................................... 3-17
Changing or Erasing a Sender Name .......................................................... 3-18
Using the Energy Saver Mode ................................................................................ 3-19
Turning the Energy Save Feature ON ........................................................ 3-19
Returning to the Full Power Mode ............................................................. 3-21
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling ................................................................. 4-1
Read This before Entering Telephone Numbers .................................................... 4-2
Entering Pauses for Dialling .......................................................................... 4-2
Adjusting the Length of a Pause ................................................................... 4-3
Confirming a dial tone .................................................................................... 4-4
What is Speed Dialling? ............................................................................................. 4-5
One-touch Speed Dialling ................................................................... 4-5
Coded Speed Dialling .......................................................................... 4-5
Group Dialling ...................................................................................... 4-5
Setting Up One-touch Speed Dialling ..................................................................... 4-6
Setting Up Coded Speed Dialling ........................................................................... 4-14
Setting Up Group Dialling ...................................................................................... 4-22
Using Speed Dialling ................................................................................................ 4-26
Using One-touch Speed Dialling ................................................................. 4-26
Using Coded Speed Dialling ........................................................................ 4-28
Using Group Dialling .................................................................................... 4-29
Using Directory Dialling .......................................................................................... 4-31
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Using the Fax as a Copier ...................................................................................... 5-1
Preparing the Document ............................................................................................ 5-2
Setting the Document on the Fax ............................................................................. 5-3
Performing the Document Settings .......................................................................... 5-4
Making Copies ............................................................................................................. 5-5
Sending Documents ................................................................................................ 6-1
Setting a Document for Sending ............................................................................... 6-2
Preparing the Document ................................................................................ 6-2
Setting the Document on the Fax .................................................................. 6-3
Adjusting the Scanning Settings .................................................................... 6-4
Selecting a Sender Name ........................................................................................... 6-6
Using Regular Dialling ............................................................................................... 6-7
Cancelling Sending a Document ............................................................................... 6-8
Dialling Long Distance with Regular Dialling ....................................................... 6-9
Overview of Sending Methods ................................................................................ 6-11
Memory Sending ............................................................................................ 6-11
Direct Sending ............................................................................................... 6-13
Manual Sending ............................................................................................. 6-15
Contents
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re-dialling When the Line is Busy ......................................................................... 6-16
What is Automatic Redialling? .................................................................... 6-16
Setting Up Redialling .................................................................................... 6-18
Auto Redial Setup Summary ............................................................ 6-19
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location ........................................ 6-20
Sending Documents at a Preset Time .................................................................... 6-21
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/Password .............................................. 6-24
Subaddress/Password Sending with Speed Dialling .................................. 6-24
Subaddress/Password Sending with the Operation Panel Buttons ......... 6-25
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents ............................................................................................. 7-1
Receiving Documents Automatically ....................................................................... 7-2
Setting the Automatic Receive Mode ........................................................... 7-2
Messages Displayed When Receiving a Document .................................... 7-2
Turning on and Adjusting the Auto Switch Time ....................................... 7-4
Receiving Documents Manually with the Optional Handset ............................... 7-6
Receiving a Document Manually at the Fax ................................................ 7-6
Receiving a Document Manually with an Extension Telephone .............. 7-7
Changing the Remote Receive ID ................................................................ 7-8
Cancelling Receiving a Document ......................................................................... 7-10
Transferring Documents ........................................................................................... 7-11
Before You Set Up Document Transfer ..................................................... 7-11
Setting Up the Fax for Document Transfer ............................................... 7-12
Turning the Transfer Mode ON and OFF .................................................. 7-15
Turning Transfer Mode ON .............................................................. 7-15
Turning Transfer Mode OFF ............................................................ 7-15
Changing the Transfer Settings .................................................................... 7-16
Cancelling the Transfer Settings .................................................................. 7-17
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features .................................................................................. 8-1
When the Fax Displays RECEIVED IN MEMORY ............................................ 8-2
Displaying the Transaction History .......................................................................... 8-3
Printing a Memory List .............................................................................................. 8-4
Printing a Document in the Memory ....................................................................... 8-5
Re-sending a Document to the Same Destination ................................................. 8-6
Sending a Document in Memory to a Different Destination ............................... 8-7
Erasing a Document from the Memory ................................................................... 8-8
Deleting a Document with the DELETE FILE Button ............................ 8-9
Deleting a Document with the MEMORY REFERENCE Button ......... 8-9
vi
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up and Using a Memory Box .................................................................... 8-10
Before You Create Memory Boxes ............................................................. 8-11
When You Create a Memory Box ............................................................... 8-11
Access Settings ................................................................................... 8-12
Main Settings ...................................................................................... 8-12
Feature Settings .................................................................................. 8-13
Creating a Memory Box ............................................................................... 8-13
Changing the Memory Box Settings ........................................................... 8-19
Cancelling a Memory Box ............................................................................ 8-21
Sending a Document Stored in the Memory Box ..................................... 8-22
Printing a Document Received in a Memory Box .................................... 8-23
What Happens to Memory after a Power Failure ................................................ 8-24
How Your Registered Data Is Protected ................................................... 8-24
About the Backup Battery ........................................................................... 8-25
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network ........................................................................................... 9-1
What is Relay Broadcasting? .................................................................................... 9-2
Setting Up and Using a Standard Relay Unit ......................................................... 9-2
Setting Your Fax as a Relay Unit .................................................................. 9-3
Changing the Relay Broadcast Settings ....................................................... 9-6
Deleting the Relay Group .............................................................................. 9-7
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting ............................. 9-8
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialling ....................... 9-9
Sending with the RELAY BROADCAST Button ................................... 9-10
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes ............................................................................. 10-1
Setting Up and Using the Standard Mailbox Features ........................................ 10-2
Creating a Mailbox ........................................................................................ 10-2
Changing Mailbox Settings .......................................................................... 10-5
Cancelling a Mailbox .................................................................................... 10-6
Receiving a Confidential Document ........................................................... 10-7
Sending a Confidential Document .......................................................................... 10-9
Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialling ........................... 10-9
Sending a Confidential Document with the Confidential Mailbox
Button ........................................................................................................... 10-10
Contents
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling ............................................................................. 11-1
What’s Polling? .......................................................................................................... 11-2
Before You Use Polling Receiving .............................................................. 11-2
Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive a Document .......................................... 11-3
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time ............................................................ 11-5
Changing the Preset Polling Settings ........................................................ 11-11
Cancelling Preset Polling ............................................................................ 11-12
Setting Up Polling Sending .................................................................................... 11-13
Before You Can Be Polled to Send ........................................................... 11-13
Setting Up a Polling Box ............................................................................ 11-13
Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling Sending ................ 11-17
Changing the Polling Box Setup ................................................................ 11-19
Cancelling a Polling Box ............................................................................. 11-20
Chapter 12
Other Special Features ......................................................................................... 12-1
Using the Telephone ................................................................................................. 12-2
Tone Dialling on a Pulse Line ................................................................................. 12-3
Setting and Using the Program Button .................................................................. 12-4
Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp Feature ............................................. 12-7
Setting Up the Stamp Feature ..................................................................... 12-7
Turning the Stamp Feature ON/OFF .......................................................... 12-9
How the Fax Operates with Default Settings ...................................................... 12-10
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax ................................................................................... 13-1
Setting and Using the System Settings Password ................................................. 13-2
Setting the System Settings Password ......................................................... 13-2
Changing or Cancelling the System Settings Password ............................ 13-3
Restricting Fax Operation ........................................................................................ 13-5
Setting Operation Restrictions .................................................................... 13-5
Operating the Fax with Restrictions ON .................................................... 13-9
Sending a Document with Restrictions ON ................................... 13-9
Making a Copy with Restrictions ON ........................................... 13-11
Printing a Report with Restrictions ON ....................................... 13-11
Using the Telephone with Restrictions ON .................................. 13-12
Turning Restrictions OFF and ON ............................................................ 13-12
Receiving Documents from Registered Senders Only ...................................... 13-14
Using Memory Lock ............................................................................................... 13-15
Setting a Time and Password for Memory Lock ..................................... 13-15
Turning Memory Lock ON ........................................................................ 13-18
Turning Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents ........................... 13-18
viii
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists .................................................................................. 14-1
Printing the Speed Dialling Lists ............................................................................ 14-2
Printing the User Data List ..................................................................................... 14-5
Printing the List of Sender Names ......................................................................... 14-6
Activity Reports ........................................................................................................ 14-7
Printing the Activity Management Report ................................................ 14-7
Setting and Using Activity Reports ............................................................ 14-9
Memory Lists ........................................................................................................... 14-15
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions ................................................. 15-1
Removing Document Feed Jams ............................................................................ 15-2
Removing Printer Feed Jams .................................................................................. 15-3
Storing Recording Paper ........................................................................................ 15-13
Recommended Paper .................................................................................. 15-13
Storing the Paper Supply ............................................................................ 15-13
Changing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................... 15-14
Storing Toner Cartridges ........................................................................................ 15-17
Handling Cartridges .................................................................................... 15-17
Storing Cartridges ........................................................................................ 15-18
Periodic Cleaning .................................................................................................... 15-18
Cleaning the Fax Unit ................................................................................. 15-18
Opening and Closing the Operation Panel .............................................. 15-19
Opening the Operation Panel ........................................................ 15-19
Closing the Operation Panel .......................................................... 15-21
Cleaning the Scanning Area ...................................................................... 15-22
Refilling the Stamp Ink Compartment (Option) ................................................ 15-23
Error Code Table (listed by number) ................................................................... 15-24
List of LCD Display Messages (Alphabetic List) .............................................. 15-26
Questions and Answers .......................................................................................... 15-30
Can not Send Documents Correctly? ....................................................... 15-30
Can not Receive Documents Correctly? .................................................. 15-32
Can not Copy Documents? ........................................................................ 15-34
Having Other Problems? ............................................................................ 15-34
Recording the User Reminder Sheets ................................................................. 15-35
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings ......................................................................... 16-1
Opening the Data Registration Menu ................................................................... 16-2
Summary of User Data Settings ............................................................................. 16-3
User Settings .............................................................................................................. 16-4
Report Settings .......................................................................................................... 16-7
TX (Send) Settings ................................................................................................... 16-9
RX (Receive) Settings ............................................................................................ 16-12
Printer Settings ........................................................................................................ 16-14
File Settings ............................................................................................................. 16-17
System Settings ........................................................................................................ 16-23
Relationship between BATCH TX, QUICK ON-LINE TX, and Timer
Settings ..................................................................................................................... 16-27
Contents
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Specifications ........................................................................................................... A-1
General ....................................................................................................................... A-1
Operation .................................................................................................................... A-2
Dial Features .............................................................................................................. A-3
Networking Features ................................................................................................. A-3
Copier Features ......................................................................................................... A-3
Telephone Features ................................................................................................... A-4
Power ........................................................................................................................... A-4
Operating Environment ............................................................................................ A-4
Weight ......................................................................................................................... A-4
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. A-5
Appendix B
Documents You Can Scan .................................................................................... B-1
Document Media to Avoid ................................................................ B-1
Specifications for Paper Documents You Can Scan ....................... B-1
Document Thickness .......................................................................... B-1
Document Size ..................................................................................... B-2
Scanning Area on the Document ...................................................... B-2
Printing Area ....................................................................................... B-3
Glossary
Index
...................................................................................................................................... G-1
........................................................................................................................................ I-1
x
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Welcome!
Thank you for purchasing the new Canon FAX-L800. This new facsimile unit
with its added features and greater flexibility enabled by full support of ITU-T
subaddress/password sending and receiving will help you expand your work
capacity and efficiency.
This User’s Guide shows you how to get the most out of your new facsimile unit.
Whether you are sending a quick memo to the home office on the other side of
town or automatically receiving from a branch overseas or across the country, this
book shows you how to do it all quickly and easily.
Take a few minutes to browse through this User’s Guide so you know what it
contains. You do not have to read it all at once from cover to cover.
We have done our best to give you an accurate, easy-to-use User’s Guide, but if
you still have some questions about how to use your facsimile unit, feel free to
contact your local authorized Canon dealer sales or service representatives. They
will be glad to answer your questions.
Chapter 1
Welcome!
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Features
Quality Images!
Ultra High Quality (UHQ) image
Canon’s ultra-high quality image processing produces excellent
reproductions in documents you send and copy.
Subaddresses
Full support of ITU-T subaddresses and passwords
You can employ ITU-T subaddresses and passwords to
communicate not only with other Canon faxes, but fax machines
of other manufacturers as well.
ITU-T
Passwords
Laser beam printer
Quiet, clean laser technology guarantees quality reproduction.
Cut sheets OK!
You don’t need
special recording
paper!
Large paper supply
A large paper supply means less time spent loading paper in the
paper cassettes. The side paper cassette can be adjusted to fit a
variety of standard paper sizes and hold a stack of up to 100
sheets. The standard front paper cassette holds 500 sheets, for a
total of 600 sheets. The additional lower cassette, available as an
option holds another 500 sheets for a total of 1100 sheets. All
cassettes are easy to access and re-fill.
100 sheets
500 sheets
One-touch Dial
72
Automatic dialling
Includes One-touch and Coded Speed Dialling, Directory
Dialling, as well as Group dialling which allows you to send the
same document to several destinations at the touch of a button.
128
Coded Speed Dial
Relay sending
Variety of send and receive features
Includes multiple broadcasting, polling, relay sending and
receiving, and confidential mailbox sending and receiving.
Confidential sending
Sequential broadcasting
Polling
1-2
Welcome!
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ECM send and receive
ECM (error correction mode) reduces errors during sending and
receiving on noisy or poor quality telephone lines.
ECM
Incoming
document
Receiving in
memory
Memory receiving when you run out of paper
If you run out of paper while you are receiving a document, the
fax unit continues to receive by putting the remainder of the
document in the fax memory so you can print it out after you
refill the paper cassette. A memory backup function also
safeguards the contents of the memory for approximately 12
hours after a power failure.
Delayed sending
Scan a document into the memory and set for sending at a later
time so you can take advantage of holiday or late night
telephone rates.
Automatic sending
Sending
Receiving
Recording
documents
into memory
Dual access
Even while you are sending or receiving a document, you can
continue to use the fax to register information with the fax or
record documents into the memory.
Sending starts
immediately
Quick-on-line TX
Before the fax is finished scanning a long document, it will start
dialling and sending the pages that are already scanned. By the
time the last page is scanned, the document transmission is well
under way.
Easy to use
A larger display and control panel with larger buttons makes the
fax easier to use.
Chapter 1
Welcome!
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Economical and quiet
Canon’s RAPID Fusing SystemTM realizes quiet operation while
you save money. If the fax machine remains idle for a specified
length of time, the fax machine automatically shuts itself down
and enters the low energy sleep mode, and will remain in this low
energy mode until the fax machine receives a document
transmission or until you press the ENERGY SAVER button.
70 Private
memory
boxes
Expanded transaction features
You can create up to 70 private memory boxes and set them up
to receive documents. If the other party’s fax can use ITU-T
subaddresses and passwords, you can set up and use memory
boxes even if the other party’s fax unit is not a Canon fax.
JBIG, Improved image data compression
JBIG is a new ITU-T standard image data compression method.
JBIG’s compression method allows data to be compressed more
efficiently* than MMR, a convential compression method. JBIG
is especially effective when transmitting halftone image
documents. Because the smaller data size requires less
transmission time, JBIG saves you time and money.
JBIG
*
Actual compression ratio may vary with image.
1-4
Welcome!
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
This chapter shows you how to set up the fax unit.
Even if your fax unit has been set up for you, take a few minutes to glance
through this chapter to become familiar with how to use this user’s guide. You
may also want to check the fax installation to confirm that it has been done
correctly.
How to Use This Guide ............................................................................................. 2-2
Where to Set Up the Fax ........................................................................................... 2-3
Space Around the Fax ................................................................................................ 2-5
Power Requirements .................................................................................................. 2-6
General Precautions ................................................................................................... 2-7
Unpacking: Have You Got Everything? .................................................................. 2-9
Parts of the Fax .......................................................................................................... 2-11
Front View ...................................................................................................... 2-11
Rear View ....................................................................................................... 2-12
Handset (option) ........................................................................................... 2-12
Removing the Shipping Material ............................................................................ 2-13
Removing the Shipping Tape ....................................................................... 2-13
Removing the Spacers Inside the Fax Unit ................................................ 2-13
Removing the Styrofoam Sheet from the ADF ........................................ 2-14
Removing the Orange Lock Plate from the Front Paper Cassette ......... 2-15
Removing the Protective Sheets .................................................................. 2-16
Assembling the Fax ................................................................................................... 2-17
Installing the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................... 2-17
Attaching Trays .............................................................................................. 2-20
Connecting the Handset (an option) .......................................................... 2-20
Connecting the Telephone Line .................................................................. 2-21
Connecting an Extension Phone ................................................................. 2-22
Loading Paper and Installing the Paper Cassettes .................................... 2-22
Turning on the Power .................................................................................... 2-27
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Use This Guide
Before you use this guide, read this list of symbols, terms, and abbreviations, and
make sure you know what they mean. A complete glossary of terms is included at
the end of this User’s Guide.
(Q2-12) A number preceded by an arrow and enclosed in
parentheses references a page number in this User’s Guide
which contains more information about the topic of the
previous sentence.
default A setting that remains in effect unless you change it.
document A document is the original sheet(s) of paper you send,
receive, or copy on the facsimile.
menu A menu is a list of options or features from which you
select an item to set up or change. A menu has a number
and title which appear in the two-line display.
search buttons The search buttons (
) change the LCD display. Press
to display the next item or choice in a menu, or press
to display the previous item or choice.
transaction number When you send or receive a document, your fax
automatically assigns the document a unique transaction
number. A transaction number is a four-digit decimal
number that will help you keep track of documents you
send and receive.
TX/RX NO. On the LCD display, TX/RX NO. is the abbreviation used
for transaction number
RX Denotes receiving.
TX Denotes transmitting or sending.
A note describes helpful hints, restrictions, or how to avoid minor difficulties.
Cautions show you how to avoid conditions or incorrect operations that could
cause damage to your hardware or software or cause personal injury.
This icon denotes feeding a document.
2-2
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Set Up the Fax
½
½
½
½
½
½
Avoid direct sunlight. If you have to locate the fax near a window,
install heavy curtains or blinds to protect the fax from direct sunlight.
Choose a flat, stable surface free of vibration.
Avoid a location subject to extreme temperature fluctuation. Use in a
location within a temperature range of 10gC to 32.5gC.
32.5gC
10gC
Do not set up the fax near a television, radio, or heavy equipment like
copy machines, air conditioners, computers, or large printers that can
generate strong electromagnetic fields. Large equipment can generate
electronic noise that can interfere with the operation of the fax.
Choose a location that is clean and free from dust and moisture.
Do not use or store the fax outdoors.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Line
½
½
Place the fax unit near a telephone line.
To avoid damage to the fax unit from overheating, do not block the
exhaust vent. Install the fax unit approximately 10 cm away from walls
or other equipment.
2-4
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Space Around the Fax
To ensure proper ventilation and easy operation, set up the fax in an area that
meets the minimum requirements for clearance as illustrated below.
To avoid damage to the fax unit from overheating, do not block the exhaust vent.
Install the fax unit approximately 10 cm away from walls or other equipment.
795 mm
701 mm
545.6 mm
425.6 mm
406 mm
HANDSET (optional)
460 mm
LOWER FRONT
PAPER CASSETTE
(optional)
460 mm
460 mm
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Requirements
½
½
½
Place the fax near a standard 230 V AC power outlet. This fax unit is
intended for domestic use. Do not attempt to use it outside the country
where you purchased it.
Do not plug the power cord into an extension cord connector or power
strip shared with other plugs.
Do not plug the fax into a power outlet shared with an air conditioner,
personal computer, electric typewriter, copier, or other equipment that
generates electrical noise.
½
½
Check the plug frequently and make sure that it is firmly plugged into
the socket.
Do not plug the power cord into an uninteruptable power supply
(UPS).
2-6
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Precautions
½
½
½
½
½
To avoid serious injury, never disassemble the fax. Exposed power
points inside the fax can cause electrical shock if you touch them.
After you unplug the fax unit, always wait at least 5 seconds before you
plug it in again. Always unplug before you move the fax.
OFF
5 sec.
ON
During electrical storms, disconnect the plug from the power outlet.
The fax can hold documents in the memory for up to 12 hours.
OFF
Before you attach or remove the plug from the power outlet, make
sure your hands are dry.
Do not stack boxes or furniture around the power outlet. Keep the
area open so you can reach the outlet quickly. If you notice anything
unusual (smoke, strange odors, noises) around the fax, turn the fax off
immediately and unplug it. Call for service.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
½
½
½
½
Before you transport the fax unit, remove the cartridge. To protect the
cartridge from bright light, cover it with its original protective bag or a
cloth.
Keep liquids, cleaners, and other solvents away from the fax unit. Keep
metal pins, paper clips, staples and other objects away from the fax. If
something falls into the fax unit, remove the plug from the power
outlet, and call for service.
Do not set the fax unit, other equipment, or furniture on the power
cord. Never knot the power cord or wrap it around another object.
To avoid paper jams, never unplug the power cord, open the printer
cover or remove a paper cassette during printing.
OFF
When you lift the fax, hold it by the front and back sides. Never try to
lift the fax by gripping the side paper cassette and the feeder right
cover.
½
½
When you lift the fax unit, tilt it back slightly to prevent the front
cassette from sliding out of the fax unit.
Never grip and lift the fax by the feeder right cover. Always grip and
lift by the front and back sides as shown in the illustration.
2-8
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking: Have You Got Everything?
As you unpack the fax, save the carton and packing material in case you want to
move or ship the fax unit in the future. Ask someone to help you remove all
items from the box. You will need someone to hold the box while you lift the fax
unit and its protective packaging out of the carton.
Documentation and Destination Labels
Telephone Line
Output Tray
Power Cord
Document Tray
Fax Unit
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check each item against this list as you remove it from the box.
½
½
½
½
½
½
½
½
½
1 Fax machine
1 Document tray
1 Output tray
1 Side paper cassette (multi-size, 100-sheet capacity)
1 Front paper cassette (A4-size, 500-sheet capacity)
1 Power cord
1 Telephone line
4 Sheets of destination labels
1 User’s Guide
Document tray
Fax unit
(with side cassette and
front cassette installed)
User’s Guide
Power cord
Destination labels x 4
Output tray
Telephone line
Options
½
½
½
½
½
HANDSET KIT
G3 FAX OPTION MEMORY VII (2 MB) (H11-4711)
G3 FAX OPTION MEMORY VII (4 MB) (H11-4721)
Verification Stamp Unit 1 (H12-3162)
FXL-CASSETTE FEEDER 5 (A4, 500-sheet capacity) (H12-3153)
Supply
½
Canon FX4 Toner Cartridge
2-10
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the Fax
Take a few moments to look over the fax and become familiar with its parts.
Front View
Handset (option)
Detachable handset.
Document guides
Adjusts to the width of the
document.
Operation panel
Use the operation panel buttons to
operate the FAX-L800
Document extension tray
Open to support long documents
during scanning.
LCD display
Displays menu items
and messages.
Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF)
Holds documents for
scanning.
Warning lamp
Blinks red when a problem
occurs.
Speaker volume
switch
Adjusts the speaker’s
volume.
Paper level gauge
Output tray
Holds printed documents
after they are ejected
form the fax.
Document tray
Holds sent or copied
documents.
Upper front paper cassette
Holds 500-sheets of A4-size
paper.
Lower front paper cassette (option)
Holds 500-sheets of A4-size paper.
Side paper cassette
Adjustable to letter, A4, and legal
paper sizes. Holds about 100-
sheets of paper.
Exit paper cover
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear View
Printer cover
Covers the
Power connector
toner cartridge.
Connect the power cord here.
Handset jack
Connect the optional handset
jack or an extension phone
jack here.
Feeder right cover
Provides access to
remove paper jams.
Telephone line jack
Connect the telephone line here.
Right cover
Provides
access to
remove
Lifting handle
Grip the fax here and on the
opposite side to lift the fax
unit.
paper jams.
Handset (option)
Depending on countries, the handset type 1 or type 2 is optional.
Type 1
Type 2
Hook key
Dialling keys
Hook key
RP key
Press to redial the last number you called.
R key
If your fax is connected to a
DEF
switchboard you may have to
3
ABC
MNO
2
6
JKL
1
use this key. Call your Canon
WXYZ 9
5
GHI
TUV
4
8
PQRS 7
Åî
sales or service outlet for
0
details.
Ringer volume switch
Adjusts the volume of the
ringer. There are three
settings: HIGH, LOW and
OFF.*
Ringer volume switch
Adjusts the volume of the ringer.
Use a pen or other pointed object
to adjust the switch to HIGH,
LOW, or OFF.
Pulse/Tone switch
Set to T for tone dialling.
Set to P for pulse dialling.
OFF
HIGH
LOW
*
HIGH, MIDDLE, or LOW in some areas.
2-12
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Shipping Material
All shipping materials must be removed. Shipping materials are attached inside
the fax unit and on the front paper cassette to protect delicate parts from
vibration during shipping.
Removing the Shipping Tape
Remove all the shipping tape from the unit.
Removing the Spacers Inside the Fax Unit
1. Pull up the release lever to unlock the printer cover and lift it to open.
Release lever
100%
50%
0%
L
TR
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove the left and right spacer.
Spacers
3. Close the cover.
Save the left and right spacer. You may want to insert them again if you have to
transport the fax unit.
Removing the Styrofoam Sheet from the ADF
1. To open the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), grip the operation panel
and gently pull the panel up until it opens partially.
2. Remove the styrofoam sheet.
100%
50%
0%
A4
3. Gently push the operation panel shut until it clicks.
2-14
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Orange Lock Plate from the Front Paper
Cassette
1. Open the front paper cassette and remove it from the fax unit.
100%
50
0%
A4
2. Set the front paper cassette down on a flat, stable surface.
3. With your right hand hold the orange lock plate and use your right thumb to
pull up the release lever and slide the plate to the left.
Metal Base
Pull up this
release lever
then slide to
the left.
A4
Pushing the metal base down hard might break the cassette.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the orange lock plate releases, lift it up.
100%
50%
0%
A4
5. Insert the paper cassette in the fax unit. (Q2-25)
6. Repeat this procedure for the other front paper cassette if you have two front
paper cassettes installed on the fax unit.
Save the orange lock plate of the paper cassette. You may want to insert it again
if you have to transport the fax unit.
Removing the Protective Sheets
The LCD on the operation panel and the paper level gauge on the front paper
cassette are covered with plastic sheets to protect them during shipping. This
protective material should be removed before you use the fax unit.
LCD
Paper Level Gauge
100%
50%
0%
A4
100%
50%
0%
A4
1. Remove the plastic sheet covering the LCD on the operation panel.
2. Remove the plastic sheet covering the paper level gauge on the front paper
cassette.
3. If you have two front paper cassettes, remove the plastic sheet covering the
paper level gauge on the other front paper cassette.
2-16
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The second front paper cassette is an option. (Q2-10)
Assembling the Fax
Follow the instructions in this section to assemble the fax and prepare it for full
operation.
Installing the Toner Cartridge
Install only a Canon FX4 Toner Cartridge in your fax machine.
Installing any other type of cartridge in this fax unit could damage the fax unit
and void your warranty. Leave the toner cartridge in its protective bag until you
are ready to install the cartridge. Handle the toner cartridge carefully. (Q15-17)
1. Pull up on the lever above the į mark to open the printer cover.
100%
50%
0%
A4
2. Remove a new toner cartridge from its protective bag.
Save the protective bag. You can use it later to cover the cartridge if you have
to remove it from the fax machine.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Save the protective bag and all other shipping material. You will need this
material later when you dispose of the cartridge after it has run out of toner.
(Q15-15)
3. Hold the cartridge by the ends and rotate it slowly in the direction of the
arrows five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
4. Place the new cartridge on a stable, flat, clean surface. As you steady the
cartridge with one hand, remove the seal by gently pulling the plastic tab with
your other hand. Use a firm, even pull to avoid breaking the seal.
Pull straight out.
Pull in this direction.
Top View
Side View
Pull in this direction.
5. To avoid pinching your fingers between the toner cartridge and fax unit, grip
the cartridge as shown below.
Keep drum slot free of dust and
other foreign objects.
Do not touch the protective
shutter on bottom of cartridge.
2-18
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Load the cartridge in the direction indicated by the arrow. Gently slide the
cartridge into the printer area until it is down inside the fax unit and level.
100%
50%
0%
A4
7. Shut the printer cover until you hear it lock.
100%
50%
0%
A4
½
The fax unit will not operate if the printer cover is not closed completely.
If the printer cover is open (and the fax unit is plugged in), you will see a
message:
CHECK PRINTER COVER
Open the cover again and make sure the toner cartridge is level. Then shut
the printer cover again until you hear it lock.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching Trays
1. Attach the output tray to the side of the printer.
2. Attach the document tray to the side of the fax unit, just above the output
tray.
Document Tray
Output Tray
Connecting the Handset (an option)
A telephone handset is available as an option for the fax machine.
This handset is for use with Listed Canon Facsimile machine only.
1. Fit the handset cradle over the holes.
2. Fasten the handset cradle with the screws provided.
2-20
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Connect the end of the handset connector cord to the jack marked with the
handset icon ( ).
4. Place the handset on the handset cradle.
Connecting the Telephone Line
1. Connect one end of the supplied telephone line to the fax jack marked L .
2. Connect the other end of the telephone line to your wall telephone jack.
To avoid electorical shock, connect the telephone line to the fax first. Then
connect the line to the wall telephone jack.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting an Extension Phone
To connect an extension phone to the fax, you have to use the handset jack.
Only one jack is provided to be used with the optional handset or an extension
phone. A separate jack is not provided for an extension phone.
1. Connect the extension phone cord to the jack marked with the handset icon
(
).
Loading Paper and Installing the Paper Cassettes
Before you load paper, follow these general guidelines:
½
The side paper cassette can be adjusted to accept letter, legal, or A4 size
paper.
½
½
Use Canon standard 64-90 g/m2 weight paper.
To avoid paper jams, do not load wrinkled or curled paper in the paper
cassette.
½
½
To avoid paper curling, do not open paper packs until you are ready to load
the paper in the fax unit. Store unused paper from opened packs in a cool,
dry location.
Let the paper run out before you refill the paper cassette. Avoid mixing new
paper with paper remaining in the paper cassette.
2-22
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Paper in the Side Paper Cassette
1. Pull out the side paper cassette.
2. Check the selector inside the side paper cassette and make sure it is set for
the size of the paper you are loading.
If the setting is correct, go on to step 3.
-or-
To set the paper cassette for a different paper size, slide the selector to the
correct position.
To release the guide, push it gently toward the center of the paper cassette.
Gently push it up or back until the tip is just below the line of the setting you
want. Then push it out toward the side of the paper cassette to lock it.
When you set to
letter size.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. The side paper cassette holds approximately 100 sheets of paper. Before you
load paper into the side paper cassette, tap the edges of the stack to make
sure the leading edge and sides of the stack are even.
4. Load the paper into the side paper cassette. Slide the edge of the stack under
the front tabs of the paper cassette.
Make sure the paper stack is not higher than the load limit marks (ĬĬĬ) on
the left side of the paper cassette.
Check the corners of the stack and make sure they are below the tabs at the
front end of the paper cassette.
2-24
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Gently insert the side paper cassette into the fax until you hear it click.
Inserting the side paper cassette carelessly may cause paper jams and distorted
images. If you pull the side paper cassette out with paper remaining in the paper
cassette, make sure no paper is out of the paper cassette and that there is no
loose paper inside the fax unit.
Loading Paper in the Front Paper Cassette
1. To pull out the front paper cassette, lift it up at a slight angle then pull it up
and out.
A4
2. Before you load a stack of paper in the front paper cassette, tap the leading
edge of the paper stack on a flat surface so the edges are evenly aligned.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Set the paper stack into the front paper cassette.
100%
50%
0%
A4
Before loading 500 sheets, divide the stack into approximately equal thirds about
1,5 cm thick. Then load each stack separately. The paper stack should not be
higher than the load limit marks (ĬĬĬ) on the side of the paper cassette. Make
sure the stack is below the tabs at the front of the paper cassette.
100%
50%
0%
A4
Check the front corners of the stack and make sure they are below the tabs.
4. Gently insert the front paper cassette into the fax unit until you hear it click.
2-26
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
The paper level gauge on the front paper cassette tells you the level of the
current paper supply without opening the paper cassette. When you see the
paper level gauge drop, make sure you have a supply of paper on hand to fill
the cassette. When you see the SUPPLY REC. PAPER message, re-fill the
cassette.
100%
A4
50%
0%
Turning on the Power
1. Connect the power cord to the power receptacle on the rear of the fax unit.
2. Connect the other end of the power cord to the power source.
The fax must be connected to a properly grounded, three-prong 230 V AC outlet.
After you connect the power cord to the power source, the fax LCD display
will light. There is no power switch on the fax unit.
200 – 240 V AC
Power Outlet
It will take a few seconds for the unit to warm up.
PLEASE WAIT
Chapter 2
Setting Up
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The unit has warmed up and is ready to use when you see the date and time
display.
26/12 ’97 FRI 12:20
When the date is displayed on the LCD, the fax is in the standby mode and ready
for normal operation. If the alarm starts blinking red, wait for one of the
following messages to appear.
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
The toner cartridge has run out of toner.
Replace the toner cartridge.
CHECK PRINTER COVER The printer cover is not closed completely. If it
does not close easily, do not force it. Remove the
toner cartridge, and insert it again. Make sure it
is sitting level inside the fax machine then close
the printer cover again. And make sure the toner
cartridge is installed in the fax unit.
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
One of the paper cassettes is empty or one of the
paper cassettes is not seated correctly inside the
fax machine. Remove each cassette. Make sure
the stack of paper is below the tabs and insert
the paper cassette again. Push the paper
cassettes all the way in until they lock in place.
When ENERGY SAVER is ON, the fax switches to the energy save mode in a
specified length of time (Q3-19, 16-26). The ENERGY SAVER indicator lights
red and ENERGY SAVER appears in the LCD display.
ENERGY SAVER
ENERGY SAVER
To restore to the standby mode, press the ENERGY SAVER button.
2-28
Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Getting Started
This chapter describes some important settings that you should perform before
you use the fax.
Before you use the fax you should set the correct date and time, register the fax
unit telephone number, and register the unit name (your personal name or a
company name). If these tasks have been done for you, then you may want to
enter your own sender name. (Q3-17)
First, we will describe the operation panel buttons and give a brief introduction
to the basic procedures for browsing through the menus and finding the items
you want. Then we will guide you step by step through the basic procedures that
must be performed before you use the fax for the first time.
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels closed) ....................................................... 3-2
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels open) ......................................................... 3-4
Using the Menus and Buttons ................................................................................... 3-5
General Guidelines for Registering Information ........................................ 3-5
Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 3-5
Entering Names for Registration .................................................................. 3-7
Menu Button Summary Table ........................................................................ 3-8
Checking and Setting the Telephone Line ............................................................. 3-10
Registering Required Sender Information ............................................................ 3-11
What is Sender Information? ....................................................................... 3-12
Registering the Sender Information ....................................................................... 3-13
Registering Sender Names ....................................................................................... 3-17
Registering a Sender Name .......................................................................... 3-17
Changing or Erasing a Sender Name .......................................................... 3-18
Using the Energy Saver Mode ................................................................................ 3-19
Turning the Energy Save Feature ON ........................................................ 3-19
Returning to the Full Power Mode ............................................................. 3-21
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels closed)
10
1
ENERGY SAVER
2
11
3
CHANGE CARTRIDGE REC. PAPER
DARKER
MEMORY
IN USE
12
13
14
SUPER FINE
FINE
4
STANDARD
LIGHTER
TEXT
STANDARD
TEXT/PHOTO
MANUAL RX
DIRECT TX
TTI SELECTOR
RESOLUTION
CONTRAST
DOCUMENT TYPE
5
6
01
02
06
10
14
18
22
26
30
03
07
11
15
19
23
27
31
04
08
12
16
20
24
28
32
05
09
13
17
21
25
29
R
PROGRAM
DELETE FILE
CLEAR
SET
15
16
7
8
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
17
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
18
9
3-2
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ቢ
LCD Display
ቯ
Direct TX
Displays messages and prompts during operation.
Displays selections, text, numbers and names when
registering information.
Sets the fax in the direct sending mode so you can send
a document ahead of other documents stored in the fax
memory. Direct sending scans a document and sends it
immediately without storing the document in the
memory.
ባ
ቤ
Resolution
Sets the resolution for documents you send.
ተ
ቱ
TTI selector
Contrast
Enters a registered sender’s name to appear at the top
of the document you are sending.
Adjusts the lightness/darkness of documents you send
or copy.
R
ብ
ቦ
ቧ
Document type
Adjusts quality for documents with only text or with
both photos and text.
Press to dial an outside telephone number, or an
extension number, when the fax is connected through a
switchboard (PBX).
Program
One-touch Speed Dialling buttons
Dial numbers registered under One-touch Speed
Dialling buttons.
Registers multi-step setting normally done by pressing
buttons on the operation panel so you can do them at
the press of single button.
Delete file
One-touch Speed Dialling panels
Deletes documents waiting in memory for sending.
Clear
The first panel displays buttons 01-32. Open the first
panel to access buttons 33-64. Open the second panel
to access buttons 65-72 and the registration buttons.
Clears an entire entry during information registration.
Set
ቨ
Numeric keypad
Selects a menu item during data registration.
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter phone
numbers when dialling. These buttons also enter text,
numbers, and symbols when registering names and
numbers.
ቲ
Coded dial
A press on the button followed by a three-digit code
dials the telephone number registered for Coded Speed
Dialling under that three-digit code.
Redial
ቩ
ቪ
Speaker volume switch
Adjusts the volume of the speaker.
Redials the previous number dialled manually with the
buttons on the numeric keypad.
Hook
Allows you to dial, even with the handset still in the
handset rest.
Alarm
Blinks red after a problem occurs. The problem is
described by a message in the LCD display above.
ቫ
ቭ
Energy saver
ታ
ቴ
Directory
Switches the fax out of the energy save mode.
Allows you to search for fax/telephone numbers by the
name under which they are registered for speed
dialling and then use the number for dialling.
Change cartridge
Lights when toner in the toner cartridge runs low.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Rec. paper
Copy
Copies a document.
Lights when the paper cassette runs out of paper. Re-
fill the cassette with paper.
Stop
Cancels sending, receiving, data registration, and other
operations and returns the fax to the standby mode.
Start/Scan
Memory
Lights when there are documents in the memory.
In use
Starts sending, receiving, copying and other operations.
Lights when your fax is using the telephone line.
ቮ
Manual RX
Switches the fax between the auto and manual receive
mode.
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels open)
1
OFF
65
ON
66
70
67
71
68
69
72
DATA REGISTRATION DELAYED TRANSMISSION
POLLING
CONFIDENTIAL MAILBOX
2
RELAY BROADCAST
TRANSACTION
D.T.
MEMORY BOX
MEMORY RECEPTION
REPORT
TRANSFER
STAMP
(
)
MEMORY REFERENCE
OPTION
TONE/
+
PAUSE
<
SPACE
>
SUBADDRESS
PASSWORD
DELETE
3
4
ቢ
ባ
Do not touch this switch. (Must be set off.)
Report
Prints reports about information registered in the fax.
Stamp (option)
Data registration
Starts data registration for speed dialling, sender
information, and other important settings for sending
and receiving.
Delayed transmission
Sets a time for delayed sending.
Polling
Sets a document for polling sending, and also used for
polling receiving.
Switches the fax in and out of the stamp mode. In the
stamp mode, the fax marks all documents scanned for
sending in memory mode or direct sending mode. If
you want to use the stamp feature, call your authorized
Canon dealer and request installation of this option.
ብ
D.T.
Press to confirm the dial tone when registering a
telephone number.
Confidential mailbox
Sets a document for sending to a confidential mailbox
so you can print documents received in the mailbox.
Tone/+
Connects to information services that accept tone
dialling only, even if you are using a rotary pulse line or
enters a plus sign in a fax number. And enters a plus
sign when registering your fax number.
Search buttons
ቤ
Relay broadcast
Sets a document to be sent to another fax for relay
sending.
Memory box
Scrolls the display so you can see other options and
selections in the menus during data registration.
Pause
Enters pauses between digits or after the entire phone
number when dialling or registering facsimile numbers.
Cursor buttons
Moves the cursor left or right during data registration.
Space
Enters a space between letters and numbers on the
LCD display when you are registering information
Subaddress
Allows you to enter an ITU-T subaddress so you can
send a document with a subaddress.
Password
Allows you to enter an ITU-T password so you can
send a document with a password.
Delete
During a step when you are registering or entering a
number, press this button to delete the number. (This
button deletes number entries only).
Sets a document to be stored in a memory box, or
opens a memory box so you can print documents
receivied in the memory box.
Memory reception
Switches the fax in and out of the memory lock mode.
In the memory lock mode, the fax stores all documents
it receives in the memory.
Transfer
Switches the fax in and out of transfer mode. In the
transfer mode the fax unit sends all documents it
receives to another fax machine at your home or
another office.
Transaction
Displays information about previous sending and
receiving transactions.
Memory reference
Performs operations with documents currently stored
in the memory, including printing a list of documents,
printing a documents, sending a document to another
destination, or deleting a document.
3-4
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Menus and Buttons
This section provides a brief overview on how to use the menu buttons to open
menus, make selections, and register data.
General Guidelines for Registering Information
Always keep these points in mind while you are using the menus:
½
If you pause and do not press a button for 60 seconds, the fax returns to the
standby mode automatically. You must then start the procedure again from
the beginning.
½
If your fax is set to manual receiving and the fax rings while you are
registering information, pick up the handset. If you hear a slow beep tone, the
other party is trying to send you a document. Press STOP and press START/
SCAN to receive the document.
Using the Menus
The fax employs a menu system you can use to register important information or
to set up important features. Here we will describe how to display and open these
menus. The content and purpose of each menu is described in another chapter.
(Q16-3)
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels so you can see the operation
panel buttons.
DATA REGISTRATION
2. Press DATA REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
SET
3. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the search buttons to display the name of the next or previous menu
title.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Note that displaying menu names with the search buttons is rotational. If you
press
with the last menu name displayed, the display rotates to the first menu
name. If you press
selection.
with the first menu displayed, the display rotates to the last
To Open a Menu and Select an Item
Press the search buttons until you see the name of the menu you want to open,
then press SET.
SET
Press the search buttons to browse through the menu items then press SET to go
to the next level.
To Return to the Previous Level
DATA REGISTRATION
Press DATA REGISTRATION to return to the previous level so you can
continue browsing. If you continue to press DATA REGISTRATION you will
return to the standby mode.
To Return to Standby Immediately
Press STOP to return to standby.
If you do not press a button for 60 seconds, the fax will automatically return to
standby.
3-6
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering Names for Registration
When you come to a step that requires entering a name for data registration,
follow the procedure below.
In a display that requires a name entry, the uppercase letter, lowercase letter or
number in the upper right corner of the LCD display tells you the entry mode.
UNIT NAME
:A
1. Press to change the entry mode.
*
Display Entry mode
What it does
:A
Uppercase letter Allows you to enter uppercase letters. You can
also press # to enter a symbol.
:a
Lowercase letter Allows you to enter lowercase letters. You can
also press # to enter a symbol.
:1
Number
Allows you to enter numbers. You can also
press # to enter a symbol.
The numeric keypad buttons are clearly labelled with one number and some
letters.
Numeric keypad
Uppercase
:A
Lowercase
:a
Number :1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
˜
ABCÅÄÁÀAÂÆÇ
DEFÐËÉÈÊ
GHIÏÍÌÎ
JKL
abcåäáàa˜âæç
defðëéèê
ghiïíìî
jkl
˜
MNOÑØÖÓÒOÔ
mnoñøöóòo˜ô
pqrs þ
PQRS Þ
TUVÜÚÙÛ
tuvüúùû
wxyzy´
´
WXYZY
–.*#!“,;:ˆ` =/’?$
࠽ %&+()[]ßà‹› Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
2. Press the appropriate button to enter the letter or number.
Keep pressing the button until the letter you want appears.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
If you go past the letter you want, you will have to keep pressing the button
until it appears again.
3. If the next letter you want to enter is under another button, just press that
button to move the cursor right and enter the first letter of that group with a
single button press.
-or-
If the next letter you want to enter is under the same button you just pressed,
press to move the cursor to the right one space. Then keep pressing the
button again until the letter you want appears.
½
You can also enter symbols. Just press # until you see the symbol you
want, then press to move the cursor one space to the right.
½
To enter a space, press SPACE.
To Correct a Mistake
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor left or right to position it under the
incorrect letter. Then enter the correct letter.
-or-
Press CLEAR to delete the entire entry so you can start again.
Menu Button Summary Table
Whenever you come to a step where you must enter a number or name for data
registration – in this section or in any part of this User’s Guide – refer to the table
below.
To see the buttons below, open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels.
Buttons for registering information
The search buttons display the next or previous menu item.
Press
to display the next item of the menu. If you press
when the last item is displayed, the display rotates to the first
item on the menu.
Press
to display the previous item of the menu. If you press
when the first item is displayed, the display rotates to the last
item on the menu.
3-8
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buttons for registering information (con’td)
SET
Press SET to select the current item and display the next level of
the menu.
Switches the entry modes.
*
:A
Uppercase letter entry mode. You can enter uppercase letters
only.
:a
Lowercase letter entry mode. You can enter lowercase letters
only.
:1
Number entry mode. You can enter numbers only.
ABC
WXYZ
More than one letter is assigned to a button. Press to enter the
2
9
to
*
text entry mode then press the button for the letter you want to
enter. If the letter you want to enter is not displayed first, keep
pressing the button until it appears. If the next letter is under
another button, just press that button to enter the first letter of
the group and then keep pressing the button until the letter you
want appears.
-or-
If the next letter is under the same button, press to move the
cursor right one space then press the button again to enter the
first letter of the group. Keep pressing the button until the letter
you want appears.
The cursor buttons move the cursor left or right.
#
Press # to enter a symbol. You can enter symbols in the text or
number entry mode. Keep pressing # until the symbol you want is
displayed then press to move the cursor to the right. You can
enter these symbols:
–.*#!“,;: ˆ ` =/ ’?$
࠽ %&+()[]ßà‹› SPACE
Enters a space between letters or numbers. You may enter spaces
in telephone numbers – they do not affect dialling. Pressing
SPACE also deletes the character at the cursor position.
DELETE
CLEAR
STOP
Deletes the number from the right digit.
Clears the entire entry if you want to erase it and start again.
After you are finished making settings or registering information,
press STOP to return to the standby mode.
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking and Setting the Telephone Line
If you are not sure what type of telephone line you have, check with your local
telephone company. To operate the fax you must know if the fax is connected to
a tone or rotary pulse line. The fax can be set to operate with either type of
telephone line. The fax unit is set to operate through a tone line without making
adjustments.
Use this procedure to switch the fax set-up between tone and pulse dialling.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
SET
3. Press SET again.
USER SETTINGS
1.DATE & TIME
4. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
USER SETTINGS
11.TEL LINE TYPE
SET
5. Press SET.
TEL LINE TYPE
TOUCH TONE
3-10
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Display and check the current line setting. Use the search buttons to alternate
the settings.
TEL LINE TYPE
TOUCH TONE
TEL LINE TYPE
ROTARY PULSE
SET
7. Display the setting you need, then press SET.
8. Press STOP to return to standby.
Registering Required Sender Information
In this section we will show you how to set up the fax so the following
information prints at the top of every document you send:
½
½
½
Your fax number
Your personal name or company name
Time and date of transmission
Your fax is already set to print this information at the top of every document you
send, but you must register your fax unit’s telephone number, your personal
name or company name, the current date, and the current time with the features
provided in the USER SETTINGS menu. (Q16-4)
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is Sender Information?
In this section we will show you how to set up the fax so the following
information prints at the top of every document you send:
DATE AND TIME
This is the date and time
of the transmission
26/12 ’97 14:26 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
QADAM BOOKS, CPA
P.001/002
Telephone number
This is your fax
December 28, 1995
Dear Member,
telephone number. You
can set TX TERMINAL
ID feature to set the
prefix for this number as
FAX or TEL. (Q16-5)
By now you have all had a chance to become familiar with your new
Canon fax units and are ready to set up a reliable, economical
communications network that offers many exciting features.
We can save money by scanning documents in the memory and then
setting the delayed timer to send all the documents at the same
time later at night to take advantage of late night rates.
Many of us are separated by long distances and reside in
different time zones. We can set up the polling feature to poll
and receive documents from each other when we are not in the
office. For sensitive material about clients and confidential
bids, we can set up and use the confidential mailbox features. We
will also be able to keep down costs by limiting use of the fax
to operators who know the correct department codes and passwords.
Unit name or sender’s
name
This is the UNIT NAME
or a sender name you
select with the TTI
SELECTOR button
when you scan the
document for sending.
Relay sending is another money saver. We can designate one relay
fax in your area, send one transmission from the home office on
the East coast and then have the document relayed to you loc. ally
We hope you will have these features set up in the very near
future so we can enjory more efficient, secure, and ecomical
facsimile communications.
Destination
If you dialled with a
speed dialling button,
the other party’s name
appears here.
Page number
The page number of the document.
Current page/Total page*
*When all pages can be scanned in the
memory sending, the page total is
printed.
For documents that you receive, you can turn on the RX FOOTER feature which
displays the date, time received, transaction number, and page number in the
lower right corner of the document. (Q16-13)
26/12 ’97 FRI 14:52 [TX/RX NO 5041]
001
3-12
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering the Sender Information
Follow this procedure to set the current date and time, register the number of
your own fax unit, and register your name or company name.
1. Open the USER SETTINGS menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
USER SETTINGS
1.DATE & TIME
2. Open the DATE & TIME menu. Press SET.
DATE & TIME
25/10 ’97
11:30
3. Register the date and time.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the day, month, and year.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
DATE & TIME
26/12 ’97
11:30
PQRS
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the current time.
½
½
½
Use the 24-hour format to enter the time (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
Just enter the new number over the old number.
You can also use the cursor buttons to move the cursor without changing
a number entry.
½
To restore the previous entry, press CLEAR.
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATE & TIME
26/12 ’97
08:45
SET
Press SET.
DATE & TIME
DATA ENTRY OK
USER SETTINGS
2.UNIT TELEPHONE #
4. Enter the unit telephone number. The unit telephone number is the
telephone number for your own fax.
SET
Press SET.
UNIT TELEPHONE #
TEL=
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use these buttons on the numeric keypad to enter your own fax number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
Data entry buttons
PQRS
WXYZ
0-9
Enters a number.
SPACE
DELETE
Enters a space (spaces are optional).
Deletes the rightmost digit of the number you are entering so
you can enter a new digit.
CLEAR
TONE/+
Clears the entire entry if you want to start again.
Enters a plus sign (+).
You can register a number of up to 20 digits.
UNIT TELEPHONE #
TEL=
123 4567
SET
Press SET.
UNIT TELEPHONE #
DATA ENTRY OK
3-14
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Enter the unit name.
USER SETTINGS
3.UNIT NAME
SET
Press SET.
UNIT NAME
:A
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to 24
characters.
You can enter letters in upper or lower case and enter numbers. In the upper
right corner of the display you will see the letter A. This means you are in the
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
uppercase letter entry mode. Press the asterisk ( ) button on the numeric
*
keypad to switch the entry mode.
Display Press keypad buttons to enter:
:A
:a
Uppercase letter entry mode
Lowercase letter entry mode
Number entry mode
:1
Above each button on the numeric keypad, there is a group of letters. These
are the letters you can enter with the button below.
Each button contains the upper and lower case letters for its group of letters.
Press the button of the letter you want to enter. If the letter you want is not
displayed first, keep pressing the button until the letter you want appears.
If you go past the letter you want, just keep pressing the button until you see it
again.
To enter a space:
Press SPACE to enter a space.
SPACE
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enter a number:
Press to enter the number entry mode (:1)
*
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Press the appropriate button on the numeric keypad to enter a number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SPACE
Press SPACE to move to the next column.
To enter a symbol:
These standard symbols are available for entry:
–.*#!“,;: ˆ ` =/ ’?$
࠽ %&+()[]ßà‹› Press # until you see the symbol you want.
Press SPACE to move to the next column.
SPACE
To delete:
CLEAR
If you make a mistake and want to delete the entire entry so you can start again,
press CLEAR.
To make a correction:
Press the left or right cursor button to move the cursor under the letter or
number you want to change.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Press a button to enter a letter or number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
UNIT NAME
:A
CANON DIV. #20
PQRS
SET
When you are finished entering the unit name, press SET.
UNIT NAME
DATA ENTRY OK
:A
3-16
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This completes registering all of the required sender information for your fax.
6. Press STOP to return to standby.
Registering Sender Names
Registering alternative sender names is optional but you may want to register
sender names if many people are using the fax. If each user registers his or her
personal name as a sender name, they can enter their sender name to replace the
UNIT NAME printed at the top of documents they send. (Q3-12)
To enter the sender name, press TTI SELECTOR when you scan the document
for sending. (Q6-6)
Registering a Sender Name
Follow this procedure to register sender names.
1. Open the USER SETTINGS menu. (Q3-13)
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
USER SETTINGS
4.SENDER’S NAME
SET
3. Press SET.
SENDER’S NAME
01:
4. Press the search buttons to display the number where you want to register
your name.
-or-
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number.
½
Up to 99 numbers are available. One number can accept a single name
entry.
½
If a name is already registered, you will see that name to the right of the
number.
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
Keep pressing the search buttons until you see a number with no entry.
SENDER’S NAME
05:
SET
5. Press SET.
SENDER’S NAME
05:
:A
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
6. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
24 characters. (Q3-7)
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
SENDER’S NAME
05:K.SMITH
:A
When you enter the name, use the same buttons you used to enter the UNIT
NAME.
SET
7. When you are finished entering the name, press SET.
SENDER’S NAME
DATA ENTRY OK
:A
SENDER’S NAME
06:
Repeat the procedure to enter another number, or press STOP to return to
standby.
Changing or Erasing a Sender Name
1. Repeat steps 1-3 of the procedure you used to register the sender name.
(Q3-13)
2. Press the search buttons to display the name you want to edit or delete.
SENDER’S NAME
10:J.SMITH
3-18
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
3. Press SET.
SENDER’S NAME
10:J.SMITH
:A
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
4. To change the sender name, use the buttons on the numeric keypad. (Q3-7)
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
-or-
PQRS
WXYZ
To delete the sender name, press CLEAR.
SET
5. When you are finished making changes, press SET.
6. Press STOP to return to standby.
Using the Energy Saver Mode
You can set the fax machine to enter a low-energy sleep mode after it remains
idle for a specified length of time. This ensures that the fax machine consumes
less power when it is not being used.
Turning the Energy Save Feature ON
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
3. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
SET
SET
4. Press SET.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
5. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
10.ENERGY SAVER
6. Press SET.
ENERGY SAVER
OFF
7. Press a search button to display ON.
ENERGY SAVER
ON
8. Press SET.
ENERGY SVR TIME
03MIN.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
9. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a number for the time
(minutes) you want the fax machine to remain idle before it automatically
enters the low-energy sleep mode. You can set a time from 03 to 30 minutes.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
ENERGY SVR TIME
30MIN.
SET
10. Press SET.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
11.PHONE NO. CHECK
3-20
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Press STOP to return to standby.
After the fax machine enters the energy saver mode, only the energy saver
indicator on the operation panel remains on and the LCD display shows:
ENERGY SAVER
Returning to the Full Power Mode
The display tells you the fax has entered the energy save mode with this message:
ENERGY SAVER
ENERGY SAVER
The indicator under the energy saver button to the right of the LCD display will
also light red.
To restore the full power mode, press the ENERGY SAVER button. While the
fax machine is powering up, PLEASE WAIT is displayed for a few moments.
PLEASE WAIT
While the fax unit is powering up, you can perform any operation.
The following actions will automatically restore the full power mode:
½
½
½
Receiving a document.
Printing an Activity Management report pre-set for printing.
Answering a call.
You can awaken the fax from the low-energy sleep mode by:
½
½
Pressing the ENERGY SAVER button.
Setting a document on the fax for sending or copying.
Chapter 3
Getting Started
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fax does not enter the energy save mode in the following cases:
½
½
When documents are stored in the memory.
When a paper or document jam has occurred, when the paper cassettes have
run out of paper, or when the toner cartridge has run out of toner.
½
When a document has been fed into the automatic document feeder (ADF).
You can not press the ENERGY SAVER button to put the fax in the energy save
mode. The fax enters the energy save mode only after the specified time has
elapsed.
3-22
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
This chapter introduces some basic dialling features then shows you how to set
up the speed dialling buttons.
Speed dialling includes One-touch Speed Dialling, Coded Speed Dialling, and
Group Dialling. Directory dialling, also described in this chapter, allows you to
locate a number for dialling by searching names and numbers registered on the
fax for speed dialling.
After you set up your speed dialling buttons, we recommend that you
occasionally print a list of all telephone numbers registered in the fax and store it
for reference. (Q14-2)
Read This before Entering Telephone Numbers .................................................... 4-2
Entering Pauses for Dialling .......................................................................... 4-2
Adjusting the Length of a Pause ................................................................... 4-3
Confirming a dial tone .................................................................................... 4-4
What is Speed Dialling? ............................................................................................. 4-5
Setting Up One-touch Speed Dialling ..................................................................... 4-6
Setting Up Coded Speed Dialling ........................................................................... 4-14
Setting Up Group Dialling ...................................................................................... 4-22
Using Speed Dialling ................................................................................................ 4-26
Using One-touch Speed Dialling ................................................................. 4-26
Using Coded Speed Dialling ........................................................................ 4-28
Using Group Dialling .................................................................................... 4-29
Using Directory Dialling .......................................................................................... 4-31
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read This before Entering Telephone
Numbers
Read this section before you register numbers for speed dialling, especially if
your site has special dialling requirements like dialling through a PBX.
When you have to make calls to an outside line or an extension, you may have to
press R before you dial the outside line number or the extension number. Before
you can use the R button, you have to register it. (Q16-6)
Entering Pauses for Dialling
If your fax is connected to a switchboard or PBX (private branch exchange), you
may have to dial a number to connect to an outside line. The outside number
must also be registered with the fax number. The switching system may also
require that you insert a pause after the outside number. For further assistance,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer sales or service representative or
your local telephone company.
Follow this procedure to enter a pause during regular dialling or when registering
a number for a speed dialling button.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
1. When you come to a step that asks you to enter a number for dialling, use the
buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=03
2. To enter a pause between two numbers, open both One-touch Speed Dialling
panels and press PAUSE. After you enter the next number, the “P” changes
to a small “p”.
PAUSE
SET
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=03P
PAUSE
3. To enter a pause at the end of a number, press PAUSE then press SET. The
pause at the end of a number appears as an upper case “P”.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=03p123 4567P
4-2
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep in mind these important points about pauses:
½
½
A pause entered within a number (p) is 2 seconds long.
You can add consecutive pauses (pp) with the PAUSE button. Each
additional pause adds 2 seconds to the pause time.
½
½
½
You can change the length of a pause entered within a number. (Qbelow)
A pause at the end of a number (P) is 10 seconds long.
You may have to insert one or more pauses at the end of a number to dial
an overseas number.
Adjusting the Length of a Pause
Follow this procedure to adjust the length of a pause entered within a number.
This procedure is effective only for adjusting the length pauses entered within
telephone numbers. The 10-second pause entered at the end of a number can not
be adjusted.
1. Open the TX SETTINGS menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
DATA REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
3.TX SETTINGS
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
3. Press SET.
TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TX SETTINGS
2.MID PAUSE SET
SET
4. Press SET.
MID PAUSE SET
02SEC
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a new time. You can enter a
number from 01 to 15 seconds. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
6. Press STOP to return to standby.
Confirming a dial tone
Use this feature only when you register a number. In some areas you may have to
confirm the dial tone in the middle of the facsimile number before dialling the
rest of the number. This is called dial tone detection.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
1. Use the numeric keys to enter the first part of the number until dial tone
detection is required.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=123
4-4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels and press D.T. for the dial tone.
Where the dial tone is inserted, you will see a small dot. During dialling, this
is where the fax waits for dial tone.
D.T.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=123·
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
3. Enter the remainder of the number
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=123·3456
PQRS
What is Speed Dialling?
Speed dialling allows you streamline and customize dialling procedures by
registering a telephone number and other important settings so you can start a
document transmission while pressing only a few buttons.
The three methods of speed dialling include:
One-touch Speed Dialling
One-touch Speed Dialling allows you to start a document transmission by
pressing only one button. You can register up to 72 destinations for One-touch
Speed Dialling. The first group of buttons numbered 01 to 32 are on the
operation panel. Open the first panel to see buttons 33 to 64, then the second
panel to see the last set of buttons 65 to 72.
Coded Speed Dialling
Coded Speed Dialling allows you to start a document transmission by pressing
the CODED DIAL button followed by a three-digit code of your choice. While
Coded Speed Dialling requires you to press more buttons, it allows you to
register up to 128 numbers.
Group Dialling
Group Dialling allows you to dial a group of registered One-touch or Coded
Speed Dialling fax numbers. By registering each group for One-touch (or Coded
Speed dialling) buttons, you press only one (or four buttons) to send the same
document to several locations.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up One-touch Speed Dialling
One-touch Speed Dialling allows you to dial a number and send a document at
the press of one button. You can register up to 72 fax numbers, one for every
One-touch Speed Dialling button on the operation panel. In addition to the
telephone number and name of the other party, you can set the timer for the
transmission as well as enter other important settings.
Follow this procedure to register a telephone number for One-touch Speed
Dialling.
1. Open the One-touch Speed Dialling menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
DATA REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REGISTRATION
2.TEL REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
TEL REGISTRATION
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
SET
Press SET.
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
01=
2. Specify the One-touch Speed Dialling button that you want to register.
Press the search buttons to scroll the display. Press the down search button to
scroll to the next number or press the up search button to scroll to the
previous number.
-or-
Close the appropriate One-touch Speed Dialling panel and press the One-
touch Speed Dialling button that you want to register.
4-6
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a number is already registered for a button, you will see that number displayed.
If a button is registered for Group Dialling, you will see GROUP DIAL.
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
10=
SET
With the number of the button you want to register displayed on the LCD,
press SET.
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
1.TELEPHONE NUMBER
SET
3. Press SET.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Enter the telephone number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
½
½
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the fax number.
PQRS
WXYZ
To enter a space, press SPACE. Spaces are optional and they are ignored
during dialling.
½
½
After you have entered the number if you see that one of the digits is
incorrect, press the left cursor key ( ) to move the cursor to the digit you
want to correct and press DELETE. Then enter the correct number.
If you make a mistake, press CLEAR to erase the number and start
again.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=123 4567
SET
4. Press SET.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
DATA ENTRY OK
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
2.NAME
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
5. Enter a name.
Press SET.
NAME
:A
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name for the number up to
16 characters long. (Q3-7)
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
NAME
:A
CANON U.S.A. NY
SET
6. Press SET.
NAME
DATA ENTRY OK
:A
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
3.OPTIONAL SETTING
This completes the minimum settings for registering a One-touch Speed
Dialling button.
To stop here and register another button
DATA REGISTRATION
Press DATA REGISTRATION.
Repeat the procedure from step 2.
To end the procedure and return to standby
Press STOP.
To perform the optional settings
7. Open the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
SET
Press SET.
OPTIONAL SETTING
OFF
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
OPTIONAL SETTING
ON
4-8
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET.
OPTIONAL SETTING
1.SET TIME
8. Set the time for the transmission.
½
If you set the timer for the One-touch Speed Dialling button, every
document you send with this button will be sent at the same time every
day.
½
½
You can set up to 5 different times in a 24-hour period for sending.
You can use this feature together with BATCH TX. If BATCH TX is ON,
the documents will be grouped and sent together at the preset time. The
fax unit will make only one phone call, saving you time and money.
(Q16-10)
SET
SET
Press SET.
SET TIME
1:
:
Press SET again.
SET TIME
1:
:
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time. Enter the time in
the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
SET TIME
1:
00:30
If you want to clear the time you have set, do the procedure from the beginning
and press CLEAR at this step, then press SET.
SET
Press SET.
SET TIME
2:
:
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
SET
Press SET.
SET TIME
2:
:
Enter another time and press SET. You can register up to 5 sending times.
-or-
To end registration and return to standby, press STOP.
-or-
DATA REGISTRATION
To continue registration for the current button, press DATA
REGISTRATION.
OPTIONAL SETTING
2.TX TYPE
SET
9. Perform the transmission type settings.
Press SET. Then press the search buttons to display the transmission type
items.
TX TYPE
REGULAR TX
TX TYPE
POLLING RX
For details about using ITU-T subaddresses and passwords, see the description of
setting up and using a memory box. (Q8-10)
The TX TYPE menu includes these items:
REGULAR TX
Designates the transaction as a normal transmission
with no special features. You can cancel the currently
set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR TX.
4-10
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIDENTIAL TX
Designates the transaction as a transmission to a
confidential mailbox. Press SET then enter the
subaddress and password for the confidential
mailbox. (Q10-9)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the other party’s
confidential mailbox.
2.SUBADDRESS
ORIG RELAY TX
The ITU-T subaddress for the other party’s
confidential mailbox.
Designates the transaction as a relay transmission
with your fax as the originator. Press SET then
enter the subaddress and password for the relay
broadcast. (Q9-2)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the relay broadcast.
The ITU-T subaddress for the relay broadcast.
2.SUBADDRESS
PSWD/SUBADDRESS
Allows you to enter a ITU-T password or
subaddress for the transmission. (Q6-24)
1.PASSWORD
2.SUBADDRESS
POLLING RX
The ITU-T password for the transmission.
The ITU-T subaddress for the transmission.
Allows you to set a One-touch Speed Dialling
button to poll another fax every time you use it to
dial. Press SET then enter the ITU-T subaddress
and password. (Q11-3)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the other party’s polling
box
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T subaddress for the other party’s polling
box.
Display the TX TYPE you wish to register, then press SET. Next, set the ITU-T
password and subaddress for the feature you selected.
You can cancel the currently set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR TX.
Only one feature can be set for TX TYPE. The next time you open the TX
TYPE menu to change the setting, you will see the currently set item displayed
first.
OPTIONAL SETTING
3.LONG DISTANCE
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. If you experience transmission errors during long distance sending, change
the long distance setting.
OPTIONAL SETTING
3.LONG DISTANCE
SET
Press SET.
LONG DISTANCE
DOMESTIC
Press the search buttons until you see the display you want.
LONG DISTANCE
LONG DISTANCE (1)
Select LONG DISTANCE (1) and try to send the document again. If this
setting does not solve the problem, try settings (2) and (3).
SET
Press SET.
OPTIONAL SETTING
4.TX SPEED
11. Change the transmission speed when it takes a long time for your document
transmissions to begin.
SET
Press SET.
TX SPEED
14400bps
If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that the
telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a lower speed. You can
select 14400, 9600, or 4800 bps.
Press the search buttons to display the speed you want to select. Then press SET.
OPTIONAL SETTING
5.ECM
SET
4-12
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Turn ECM off or on.
Press SET.
SET
ECM
ON
Press the search buttons to display OFF or ON.
ECM (error correction mode) reduces system and line errors during sending or
receiving with another fax that supports ECM. Otherwise, this setting is ignored.
If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow, you may be able to speed up
transmission time by turning ECM off.
SET
Press SET.
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
11=
This completes all settings for telephone registration of a One-touch Speed
Dialling button.
If you want to set up other buttons, repeat from step 2.
-or-
Press STOP to return to standby.
13. After you register a number for One-touch Speed Dialling, make sure you
write the name of the other party on a destination label and stick it on the
One-touch Speed Dialling panel above the number of the One-touch Speed
Dialling button where the number is registered.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Coded Speed Dialling
Coded Speed Dialling allows you to dial a number and send a document by
pressing four buttons. First you press CODED DIAL and then enter a three-digit
code. You can register up to 128 fax numbers for this speed dialling method. In
addition to the telephone number and name of the other party, you can set the
timer for the transmission and as well as enter other important settings identical
to those for Coded Speed Dialling.
Follow this procedure to register a telephone number for Coded Speed Dialling.
1. Open the Coded Speed Dialling menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REGISTRATION
2.TEL REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
TEL REGISTRATION
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TEL REGISTRATION
2.CODED SPD DIAL
SET
Press SET.
CODED SPD DIAL
000=
*
4-14
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Specify the Coded Speed Dialling code that you want to register.
Press CODED DIAL. Then use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter
a three-digit code (000-127).
-or-
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Press the search buttons to scroll the display. Press the down search button to
scroll to the next number or press the up search button to scroll to the
previous number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
If a telephone number is already registered for a three-digit code, you will see
that number displayed. If a button is registered for Group Dialling, you will see
GROUP DIAL displayed.
CODED SPD DIAL
012=
*
SET
SET
With the code you want to register displayed on the LCD, press SET.
CODED SPD DIAL
1.TELEPHONE NUMBER
Press SET again.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
3. Enter the telephone number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
½
½
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number.
PQRS
WXYZ
To enter a space, press SPACE. Spaces are optional and they are ignored
during dialling.
½
½
After you have entered the number if you see that one of the digits is
incorrect, press the left cursor key ( ) to move the cursor to the digit you
want to correct and press DELETE. Then enter the correct number.
If you make a mistake, press CLEAR to erase the number and start
again.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=123 4567
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
DATA ENTRY OK
CODED SPD DIAL
2.NAME
SET
4. Enter a name.
Press SET.
NAME
:A
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name for the number up to
16 characters long. (Q3-7)
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
NAME
:A
:A
CANON CANADA
SET
Press SET.
NAME
DATA ENTRY OK
CODED SPD DIAL
3.OPTIONAL SETTING
This completes the minimum settings for registering a three-digit Coded
Speed Dialling code.
To stop here and register another code
DATA REGISTRATION
Press DATA REGISTRATION.
Repeat the procedure from step 2.
To end the procedure and return to standby
Press STOP.
To perform the optional setting
5. Press SET to continue.
SET
OPTIONAL SETTING
OFF
4-16
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
OPTIONAL SETTING
ON
SET
Press SET.
OPTIONAL SETTING
1.SET TIME
6. Set the time for the transmission.
½
If you set the timer for the Coded Speed Dialling code, every document
you send with this code will be sent at the same time every day.
½
½
You can set up to 5 different times in a 24-hour period for sending.
You can use this feature together with BATCH TX. If BATCH TX is ON,
the documents will be grouped and sent together at the preset time. The
fax unit will make only one phone call, saving you time and money.
(Q16-10)
SET
SET
Press SET.
SET TIME
1:
:
Press SET again.
SET TIME
1:
:
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time. Enter the time in
the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
SET TIME
1:
00:30
If you want to clear the time you have set, do the procedure from the beginning
and press CLEAR at this step, then press SET.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
SET
SET
Press SET.
SET TIME
2:
:
:
Press SET.
SET TIME
2:
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Enter another time and press SET. You can register up to 5 sending times.
-or-
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
To end registration and return to standby, press STOP.
-or-
DATA REGISTRATION
To continue registration for the current button, press DATA
REGISTRATION.
OPTIONAL SETTING
2.TX TYPE
7. Perform the transmission type settings.
SET
Press SET. Then press the search buttons to display the transmission type
items.
TX TYPE
REGULAR TX
TX TYPE
POLLING RX
For details about using ITU-T subaddresses and passwords, see the description of
setting up and using a memory box. (Q8-10)
The TX TYPE menu includes these items:
REGULAR TX
Designates the transaction as a normal transmission
with no special features. You can cancel the currently
set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR TX.
4-18
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIDENTIAL TX
Designates the transaction as a transmission to a
confidential mailbox. Press SET then enter the
subaddress and password for the confidential
mailbox. (Q10-9)
1.PASSWORD
2.SUBADDRESS
ORIG RELAY TX
The ITU-T password for the other party’s
confidential mailbox.
The ITU-T subaddress for the other party’s
confidential mailbox.
Designates the transaction as a relay transmission
with your fax as the originator. Press SET then
enter the subaddress and password for the relay
broadcast. (Q9-9)
1.PASSWORD
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T password for the relay broadcast.
The ITU-T subaddress for the relay broadcast.
PSWD/SUBADDRESS
Allows you to enter a ITU-T password or
subaddress for the transmission. (Q6-25)
1.PASSWORD
2.SUBADDRESS
POLLING RX
The ITU-T password for the transmission.
The ITU-T subaddress for the transmission.
Allows you to set a Coded Speed Dialling button to
poll another fax every time you use it to dial. Press
SET then enter the ITU-T subaddress and
password. (Q11-3)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the other party’s polling
box.
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T subaddress for the other party’s polling
box.
Display the TX TYPE you wish to register then press SET. Next, set the
ITU-T password and subaddress for the feature you just selected.
You can cancel the currently set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR TX.
Only one feature can be set for TX TYPE. The next time you open the TX
TYPE menu to change the setting you will see the currently set item displayed
first.
OPTIONAL SETTING
3.LONG DISTANCE
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. If you experience transmission errors during long distance sending, change
the long distance setting.
OPTIONAL SETTING
3.LONG DISTANCE
SET
Press SET.
LONG DISTANCE
DOMESTIC
Press the search buttons until you see the display you want.
LONG DISTANCE
LONG DISTANCE (1)
Select LONG DISTANCE (1) and try to send the document again. If this
setting does not solve the problem, try settings (2) and (3).
SET
Press SET.
OPTIONAL SETTING
4.TX SPEED
9. Change the transmission speed when it takes a long time for your document
transmissions to begin.
SET
Press SET.
TX SPEED
14400bps
If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that the
telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a lower speed. You can
select 14400, 9600, or 4800 bps.
Press the search buttons to display the speed you want to select. Then press
SET.
SET
OPTIONAL SETTING
5.ECM
4-20
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Turn ECM off or on.
Press SET.
SET
ECM
ON
Press the search buttons to display OFF or ON.
ECM (error correction mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on
documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax that supports
ECM. Otherwise, this setting is ignored. If transmission speed appears to be
extremely slow, you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM
off.
SET
Press SET.
CODED SPD DIAL
013=
*
This completes all settings for telephone registration of Coded Speed Dialling
codes.
If you want to set up other codes, repeat from step 2.
-or-
Press STOP to return to standby.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Group Dialling
Group Dialling allows you to register several telephone numbers for One-touch
Speed Dialling or for Coded Speed Dialling so you can dial a large group of
numbers by pressing a One-touch Speed Dialling button, or by pressing CODED
DIAL, followed by a three-digit code. Telephone numbers already registered for
One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling can be registered as members of the group.
Follow this procedure to register a group of telephone numbers for Group
Dialling.
1. Open the Group Dialling menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
DATA REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REGISTRATION
2.TEL REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
TEL REGISTRATION
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TEL REGISTRATION
3.GROUP DIAL
SET
Press SET.
GROUP DIAL
01=
4-22
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Register the group of numbers for a One-touch Speed Dialling button or for
a Coded Speed Dialling code.
To register the group for a One-touch Speed Dialling button
Press the search buttons to scroll the number display. Press the down search
button to scroll to the next number or press the up search button to scroll to
the previous number.
-or-
01
72
Close the appropriate One-touch Speed Dialling panel and press the One-
touch Speed Dialling button you want to register.
If a number is already in use, you will see 1-TOUCH SPD DIAL, CODED
SPD DIAL or GROUP DIAL displayed.
With an empty button number displayed, press SET.
To register the group for Coded Speed Dialling
Press CODED DIAL.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit code you
want to use for speed dialling (000-127).
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
GROUP DIAL
020=
*
SET
SET
Press SET.
GROUP DIAL
1.TELEPHONE NUMBER
3. Register all the numbers for the group.
Press SET.
TEL=
To register a One-touch Speed Dialling button
Close the appropriate One-touch Speed Dialling panel.
01
72
Press the One-touch Speed Dialling button with the telephone number you
want to include in the group.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To register a Coded Speed Dialling button
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Press CODED DIAL then use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit
code where the telephone number you want to include in the group is
registered.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
You can enter up to 199 numbers.
SET
When you are finished entering telephone numbers, press SET.
GROUP DIAL
DATA ENTRY OK
GROUP DIAL
2.NAME
4. Enter a name for the group.
Press SET.
SET
NAME
:A
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name for the number up to
16 characters long. (Q3-7)
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
GHI
5
8
0
PQRS
NAME
:A
:A
CANON GROUP A
SET
Press SET.
NAME
DATA ENTRY OK
GROUP DIAL
3.SET TIME
5. Set the time for the group transmission.
½
This setting is optional. If you do not set the timer, the transmission will
begin after you press the One-touch Speed Dialling button, or press
CODED DIAL followed by a three-digit code, for the group.
½
If you set the timer for the Group Dialling code, every document you
send with this code will be sent at the same time every day.
4-24
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
½
You can set up to 5 different times in a 24-hour period for sending.
You can use this feature together with BATCH TX. If BATCH TX is ON,
the documents will be grouped and sent together at the preset time. The
fax unit will make only one phone call, saving you time and money.
(Q16-10)
SET
Press SET.
SET TIME
1:
:
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
SET
Press SET again then use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the
time. Enter the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
5
8
0
PQRS
WXYZ
SET TIME
1:
00:30
SET
SET
Press SET.
SET TIME
2:
:
6. Press SET, enter another time, and press SET. You can register up to 5
sending times.
-or-
DATA REGISTRATION
To continue registering another group, press DATA REGISTRATION.
-or-
To end registration and return to standby, press STOP.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Speed Dialling
Follow the procedures in this section to use speed dialling. The three speed
dialling methods are One-touch Speed Dialling, Coded Speed Dialling, and
Group Dialling. If you forget where a number is registered, you can find it and
dial it with directory dialling. (Q4-31)
Using One-touch Speed Dialling
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document at the press of
a One-touch Speed Dialling button.
To use this feature, you must first register a telephone number for One-touch
Speed Dialling. (Q4-6)
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
DOCUMENT READY
01
72
2. Press the One-touch Speed Dialling button where the telephone number you
want to dial is registered.
If you do not see the number of the button you want, open the first or second
One-touch Speed Dialling panel to see more buttons. After 5 seconds, the fax
starts to send the document.
TEL=
123 4567
01 CANON USA
TRANSMIT
0025
SCANNING DOC. P.001
You will see a series of brief, alternating messages that tell you the fax is
dialling, calling, then transmitting the document. The number being dialled,
name of the other party, and the transaction number of the document are also
displayed.
4-26
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important points you should keep in mind when you use One-
touch Speed Dialling:
½
To start scanning immediately, press START/SCAN. Otherwise the fax
will wait 5 seconds before it starts scanning. This timeout feature can be
turned off. (Q16-11)
½
½
To locate and press the correct button, you may have to open the One-
touch Speed Dialling panels.
The fax will not dial the number registered for the One-touch Speed
Dialling button until you set the document on the fax for sending. If you
press the button before you load the document, the fax will prompt you:
SET DOCUMENT
½
If you press a One-touch Speed Dialling button where no number has
been registered, the fax tells you:
NO TEL#
12
½
½
If you want to cancel the transmission after you press a One-touch Speed
Dialling button, press STOP. (Q6-8)
When you come to a step in any procedure where you have to dial a
number, you can press a One-touch Speed Dialling button to dial.
When you register a number for One-touch Speed Dialling, Coded Speed
Dialling and Group Dialling, you can, as an option, set the time you want your
document to go out (up to 5 different times in a day). If you are using a speed
dial button that was set by someone else, and you would like your document to
go out at the preset time, verify if the preset time feature is being used for that
button. (Q4-9, 4-17, 4-24, 16-30)
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Coded Speed Dialling
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document at the press of
the CODED DIAL button followed by a three-digit code.
To use this feature, you must first register a telephone number for Coded Speed
Dialling. (Q4-14)
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
DOCUMENT READY
2. Press CODED DIAL once.
TEL=
*
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
3. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit code of the
telephone number you want to dial (000-127).
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
After 5 seconds, the fax starts to send the document.
PQRS
TEL=
*
123 4567
001 CANON ONTARIO
TRANSMIT
0026
SCANNING DOC. P.001
You will see a series of brief, alternating messages that tell you the fax is
dialling, calling, then transmitting the document. The number being dialled,
name of the other party, and the transaction number of the document are also
displayed.
Here are some points you should keep in mind when you use Coded Speed
Dialling:
½
To start scanning immediately, press START/SCAN. Otherwise the fax
will wait 5 seconds before it starts scanning. This timeout feature can be
turned off. (Q16-11)
½
The fax will not dial the Coded Speed Dialling number until you set the
document on the fax for scanning. If you press the buttons before you
load the document, the fax will prompt you:
4-28
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET DOCUMENT
½
If you press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code where no numbers are
registered, the fax tells you:
NO TEL#
013
*
½
½
If you want to cancel the transmission after you press the buttons for Coded
Speed Dialling, press STOP.
When you come to a step in any procedure where you have to dial a number,
you can press the buttons for Coded Speed Dialling to dial.
When you register a number for One-touch Speed Dialling, Coded Speed
Dialling and Group Dialling, you can, as an option, set the time you want your
document to go out (up to 5 different times in a day). If you are using a speed
dial button that was set by someone else, and you would like your document to
go out at the preset time, verify if the preset time feature is being used for that
button. (Q4-9, 4-17, 4-24, 16-27)
Using Group Dialling
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document to several
destinations with a One-touch or Coded Speed dialling number registered for
group dialling.
To use this feature, you must first register a group of telephone numbers for One-
touch or Coded Speed Dialling. (Q4-22)
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
DOCUMENT READY
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press the One-touch Speed Dialling button, or press CODED DIAL followed
by the three-digit code, where the group of telephone numbers you want to
dial is registered.
The fax starts to send the document
or
TEL=GROUP DIAL
01 CANON USA
TRANSMIT
0025
0
1
0
0
7
SCANNING DOC. P.001
2
You will see a series of brief, alternating messages that tell you the fax is
dialling, calling, then transmitting the document. The number being dialled,
name of the other party, and the transaction number of the document are also
displayed.
Here are some points you should keep in mind when you use Group Dialling:
½
½
To start scanning immediately, press START/SCAN. Otherwise the fax
will wait 5 seconds before it starts scanning. This timeout feature can be
turned off. (Q16-11)
The fax will not dial the numbers for the Group Dialling number until
you set the document on the fax. If you press the One-touch Speed
Dialling button or press CODED DIAL followed by a three-digit code,
before you load the document, the fax will prompt you:
SET DOCUMENT
½
If you press a One-touch Speed Dialling button, or press CODED DIAL
followed by a three-digit code, where no number has been registered, the
fax will display:
NO TEL#
12
If you want to cancel the transmission after you press a One-touch or Coded
Speed Dialling button, press STOP.
4-30
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you register a number for One-touch Speed Dialling, Coded Speed
Dialling and Group Dialling, you can, as an option, set the time you want your
document to go out (up to 5 different times in a day). If you are using a speed
dial button that was set by someone else, and you would like your document to
go out at the preset time, verify if the preset time feature is being used for that
button. (Q4-9, 4-17, 4-24, 16-27)
Using Directory Dialling
Follow this procedure to look up the other party’s name and retrieve the number
for dialling. This feature is convenient when you know the other party’s name but
can not recall the One-touch Speed Dialling button, the code for Coded Speed
Dialling, or Group Dialling where the number is registered.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
2. Press DIRECTORY.
DIRECTORY DIAL
1ST LETT OF NAME :A
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
3. Press a numeric keypad button to enter the first letter of the name of the
party you are searching for.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
For example, if you press PQRS the first name and number registered for this
button letter group is displayed.
PQRS
TEL=
123 4567
10 PACIFIC BEACH
4. Press the directory search buttons on the front of the operation panel to
display the other names and numbers registered for the button letter group.
TEL=
123 4567
12 SOUTHWEST
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
The names for One-touch Speed Dial are prefixed with two digits and the
names for Coded Speed Dial numbers are prefixed with an asterisk ( )
*
and three digits.
½
½
½
½
When you reach the last number and name registered for the letter group,
you will return to the first number and name in the group.
To see numbers and names registered for other letter groups, ABC for
example, you will have to press the ABC button on the numeric keypad.
After you press a button, if you see NO TEL# in the display, this means
there are no names that begin with a letter of the button you just pressed.
After you press the directory search keys, if the display does not change
this means only one name and number is registered for the button you
just pressed.
5. With the telephone number you want to dial displayed, press START/SCAN
to start the document transmission.
TRANSMIT
0031
SCANNING DOC. P.001
4-32
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialling
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Using the Fax as a Copier
This chapter describes all the settings and procedures for using the fax unit as a
copier.
Preparing the Document ............................................................................................ 5-2
Setting the Document on the Fax ............................................................................. 5-3
Performing the Document Settings .......................................................................... 5-4
Making Copies ............................................................................................................. 5-5
Chapter 5
Using the Fax as a Copier
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparing the Document
Follow these simple guidelines to check your document before you set the
document on the fax for copying.
½
For best results, load only documents of recommended standard size and
weight. (QB-1)
½
The document guides on the automatic document feeder (ADF) can be
adjusted to the width of non-standard size paper. For best results, however,
all sheets in the stack should be of the same width.
½
½
To avoid document jams, never feed thick documents or documents backed
with carbon paper.
To avoid document jams and possible damage to the fax, avoid wrinkled or
creased paper, carbon paper, curled paper, coated paper, and onion skin or
other very thin paper.
½
The fax does not scan completely to the edges of the paper and anything
beyond this recommended margin will not be scanned for copying. See
Appendix B and check your document. (QB-2)
½
½
½
To avoid paper jams or damaging the fax, inspect the document carefully and
make sure it is free of pins, staples, paper clips, and other metal fasteners.
Make sure all the documents are dry. They should not have wet ink, glue, or
paste on their surfaces.
Before you feed a stack of documents into the fax, make sure all the pages
are the same size and thickness. Do not attempt to feed documents of
different size and thickness in the same stack.
5-2
Using the Fax as a Copier
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Document on the Fax
You can set a stack of up to 50 letter or A4 size pages or 20 legal size pages into
the fax for copying.
1. Place the document face down on the automatic document feeder (ADF) of
the fax unit.
2. If the document is too long for the automatic document feeder (ADF) (e.g.
legal size), open the document extension tray.
3. Slide the document guides to fit the width of the document.
100%
50%
0%
L
TR
Chapter 5
Using the Fax as a Copier
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Make sure the document is below the load limit marks for A4 size.
A4 /
B4 /
L
TR
LGL
5. Insert the document into the fax until you hear the fax beep.
The fax will display some messages.
MEMORY IN USE
36%
DOCUMENT READY
Performing the Document Settings
Canon’s original Ultra High Quality (UHQ) imaging technology allows you to
make copies that are very close to the quality of the original document. For best
results, adjust the settings for special documents before copying.
Follow these guidelines to change a setting:
½
½
½
The lighted indicator tells you the current setting.
Press the appropriate button repeatedly to light the setting you want.
After the document is copied, the settings return to the setting before
copying.
SUPER FINE
FINE
DARKER
STANDARD
LIGHTER
TEXT
STANDARD
TEXT/PHOTO
RESOLUTION
CONTRAST
DOCUMENT TYPE
5-4
Using the Fax as a Copier
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESOLUTION
CONTRAST
When copying a document, FINE is automatically
selected for you. (Although the resolution is
actually fixed at Ultra-Fine)
Adjusts the lightness/darkness of the document
pages scanned for copying.
DARKER
For documents with light text or
colours.
STANDARD
LIGHTER
For standard printed or
typewritten text.
For documents with dark text or
colours.
DOCUMENT TYPE
Select for documents with text only or with text and
photos on the same page.
TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT
For documents that contain text
and photographs on the same
page. Automatically adjusts the
quality of the image and text on
the same page.
For documents that contain text
without photographs.
Making Copies
Follow this procedure to use the fax as a copier.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q5-3)
2. Press COPY.
COPY
FRONT CASSETTE
01
A4
With option cassette
COPY
01
FRONT UPPER CAS. A4
Chapter 5
Using the Fax as a Copier
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If you want to select another paper cassette, open both One-touch Speed
Dialling panels, then press the search buttons.
COPY
SIDE CASSETTE
01
LGL
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies (01 to
99).
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
COPY
03
LGL
SIDE CASSETTE
½
If you make a mistake and want to start again, press CLEAR.
5. Press START/SCAN to start copying.
COPY
½
If you want to cancel the operation, press STOP.
If you select more than one copy at step 3, the unit automatically switches to the
memory copy mode. In the memory copy mode, there may be a slight
deterioration in the quality of the copy. For best results, use the direct copy mode
by printing only one copy per page (01).
5-6
Using the Fax as a Copier
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
This chapter describes fundamental procedures for dialling and sending
documents.
We will also show you how to send a document to more than one location, set a
document for delayed sending, and send a document with a subaddress and
password.
Setting a Document for Sending ............................................................................... 6-2
Preparing the Document ................................................................................ 6-2
Setting the Document on the Fax .................................................................. 6-3
Adjusting the Scanning Settings .................................................................... 6-4
Selecting a Sender Name ........................................................................................... 6-6
Using Regular Dialling ............................................................................................... 6-7
Cancelling Sending a Document ............................................................................... 6-8
Dialling Long Distance with Regular Dialling ....................................................... 6-9
Overview of Sending Methods ................................................................................ 6-11
Memory Sending ............................................................................................ 6-11
Direct Sending ............................................................................................... 6-13
Manual Sending ............................................................................................. 6-15
Re-dialling When the Line is Busy ......................................................................... 6-16
What is Automatic Redialling? .................................................................... 6-16
Setting Up Redialling .................................................................................... 6-18
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location ........................................ 6-20
Sending Documents at a Preset Time .................................................................... 6-21
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/Password .............................................. 6-24
Subaddress/Password Sending with Speed Dialling .................................. 6-24
Subaddress/Password Sending with the Operation Panel Buttons ......... 6-25
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting a Document for Sending
This section describes how to prepare a document for sending and how to
perform the initial settings before dialling.
Preparing the Document
Follow these simple guidelines to check your document before you set the
document on the fax for scanning.
½
For best results, load only documents of recommended standard size and
weight. (QB-1)
½
The document guides on the automatic document feeder (ADF) can be
adjusted to the width of non-standard size paper. For best results, all sheets in
the stack should be of the same width.
½
½
To avoid document jams, never feed thick documents or documents backed
with carbon paper.
For documents that are larger or smaller than these recommended limits,
reduce them or enlarge them on a copy machine and then send the copy.
(QB-2)
½
½
To avoid document jams and possible damage to the fax, avoid wrinkled or
creased paper, carbon paper, curled paper, coated paper, and onion skin or
other very thin paper.
The fax does not scan completely to the edges of the paper and anything
beyond this recommended margin will not be scanned for sending. For
details, refer to Appendix B. (QB-2)
½
½
½
To avoid paper jams or damaging the fax, inspect the document carefully and
make sure it is free of pins, staples, paper clips, and other metal fasteners.
Make sure all the documents are dry. They should not have wet ink, glue, or
paste on their surfaces.
Before you feed a stack of documents into the fax, make sure all the pages
are the same size and thickness. Do not attempt to feed documents of
different size and thickness.
6-2
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Document on the Fax
You can set a stack of up to 50 letter or A4 size pages or 20 legal size pages into
the fax for sending.
1. Place the document face down on the automatic document feeder (ADF) of
the fax.
2. If the document is too long for the automatic document feeder (ADF) (e.g.
legal size), open the document extension tray.
3. Slide the document guides to fit the width of the document.
100%
50%
0%
L
TR
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Make sure the document is below the load limit marks for A4 size.
A4 /
B4 /
L
TR
LGL
5. Insert the document into the fax until you hear the fax beep.
The fax will display some messages.
MEMORY IN USE
36%
DOCUMENT READY
Adjusting the Scanning Settings
Canon’s original Ultra High Quality (UHQ) imaging technology allows you to
send documents that are very close to the quality of the original document. For
best results, adjust the settings for special documents before sending.
Follow these guidelines to change a setting:
½
½
½
The lighted indicator tells you the current setting.
Press the appropriate button repeatedly to light the setting you want.
For documents that require special settings, you can set the PROGRAM
button to perform the settings with a single button press. (Q12-4)
SUPER FINE
FINE
DARKER
STANDARD
LIGHTER
TEXT
STANDARD
TEXT/PHOTO
RESOLUTION
CONTRAST
DOCUMENT TYPE
6-4
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESOLUTION
Adjusts the resolution for documents with fine text
and thin lines. The higher the resolution, the higher
the quality output, but the slower the scanning
speed.
STANDARD
For normal printed or
typewritten text.
FINE
Twice the STANDARD
resolution.
SUPER FINE
Four times the STANDARD
resolution.
CONTRAST
Adjusts the lightness/darkness of the document
pages scanned for sending.
DARKER
For documents with light text or
colours.
STANDARD
LIGHTER
For standard printed or
typewritten text.
For documents with dark text or
colours.
DOCUMENT TYPE
Select for documents with text only or with text and
photos on the same page.
TEXT/PHOTO
For documents that contain text
and photographs on the same
page. Automatically adjusts the
quality of the image and text on
the same page. After you select
TEXT/PHOTO, FINE is
automatically selected for
RESOLUTION.
TEXT
For documents that contain text
without photographs.
If you frequently need to send and receive documents that require accurate
reproduction of fine detail, you may want to change the default value for the
SUPER FINE setting. You can alternate the value for SUPER FINE between
two settings: Super Fine and Ultra Fine. The ULTRA FINE setting (16 dots/mm)
is eight times the STANDARD RESOLUTION and twice the SUPER FINE, but
you can switch to ultra fine by changing the 7. SCAN RESOLUTION setting of
the USER SETTINGS menu. (Q16-5)
If the other party does not have the ultra fine feature and you send a document
with TEXT/PHOTO set for the document type setting and ULTRA FINE set for
the resolution setting, the image the other party receives will reproduce at the
other party’s maximum resolution setting.
If you switch this setting to ULTRA FINE then every time you press the SUPER
FINE button, the fax will be enabled for scanning with the ULTRA FINE setting.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting a Sender Name
Follow this procedure to select one of the registered sender names.
½
½
Sender names are selected by pressing the TTI SELECTOR button.
This setting is optional. If you do not select a sender name before sending a
document, the registered unit name will be printed at the top of the
document in the sender information area. (Q3-12)
½
½
If you select a sender name before you send a document, it will replace the
unit name printed in the sender information area. (Q3-12)
Up to 99 sender names can be registered. At least one sender name must be
registered so you can use this feature. (Q3-17)
1. Set the document on the fax and adjust the document guides to the width of
the document. (Q6-3)
2. Dial the number.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Press the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
-or-
PQRS
Press a One-touch Speed Dialling button to dial the number. (Q4-26)
-or-
Press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code to dial the number. (Q4-28)
-or-
Use directory dialling. (Q4-31)
TTI SELECTOR
3. Press TTI SELECTOR until the desired name appears in the display.
-or-
Press TTI SELECTOR. Then press the search button until the desired name
appears in the display.
SET
4. Press SET.
5. Continue the procedure for the feature you want to use.
6-6
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Regular Dialling
When you come to a step that requires dialling a number, you can dial the
number with the buttons on the numeric keypad just like dialling a telephone
number. This is called regular dialling.
To make dialling easier, register frequently used numbers for speed dialling.
(Q4-1)
1. Set the document on the fax.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
2. Dial the telephone number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the telephone number.
PQRS
Just after you press a button if you see that you have entered the wrong
number, just press DELETE to delete the rightmost digit. Then enter the
correct number.
3. Press START/SCAN.
The fax starts scanning the first page into the memory.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling Sending a Document
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.
1. Press STOP.
If you are using direct sending, an alarm sounds and the transmission is
cancelled immediately.
-or-
If you are using memory sending, a message is displayed.
CANCEL DURING TX/RX?
YES=( ) NO=(#)
*
2. Press to cancel the transmission or press # if you change your mind and do
*
or
not want to cancel.
After you press to cancel the transmission, an alarm sounds and a report
*
prints unless this feature has been turned off. (Q16-7)
PRINTING REPORT
6-8
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialling Long Distance with Regular Dialling
Follow this procedure to dial a long distance number and send a document with
regular dialling.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can not select a sender’s name after you press HOOK or pick up the
handset.
2. Press HOOK. After you press HOOK the IN USE lamp lights and you will
be able to hear the dial tone.
TEL=
-or-
If you know the other party’s fax is set to automatic receiving, go to the next
step.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
3. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the long distance number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
If you didn’t press HOOK in step 2, you may have to insert a pause into a
number for long distance dialling. (Q4-2) For details about the location and
length of the pause, contact your local telephone company or local authorized
Canon dealer.
TEL=
011p81
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
4. Dial the remainder of the number then press START/SCAN. After a few
moments the call will connect.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
TEL=011p81 123 4567P
If you did not press HOOK in step 2, you may have to insert a pause at the end
of the telephone number. The pause at the end of the number is 10 seconds. For
details about the necessary length of the pause, contact your local telephone
company or local authorized Canon dealer.
If you have installed the optional handset, when the other party answers, you
can pick up the handset and talk.
Tell the other party to press the start button on their fax then hang up their
handset. When you hear a high pitched tone, the other fax is ready to receive.
-or-
If you hear a high pitched tone as soon as the call connects, the other party is
ready to receive.
5. Press START/SCAN on your fax and hang up your handset.
The fax starts to send the document.
If the offhook alarm starts beeping, make sure the handset is sitting correctly on
the handset cradle. The volume of the offhook alarm can be adjusted. (Q16-6)
To take advantage of the speed dialling features, register frequently dialled long
distance numbers for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling buttons. (Q4-6, 4-14)
6-10
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Sending Methods
This section briefly describes the methods and advantages of the three main
sending methods: memory sending, direct sending, and manual sending.
Memory Sending
With memory sending, document scanning and sending is fast, allowing you to get
your document back quickly so you do not have to spend so much time standing
around the fax. You can start scanning a document for sending even while the fax
is busy sending another document.
Memory
Send
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
2. Dial the other party’s fax number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (Q6-7)
PQRS
-or-
Press a One-touch Speed Dialling button to dial the number. (Q4-26)
-or-
Press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code to dial the number. (Q4-28)
-or-
Press DIRECTORY and search for the name to dial the number. (Q4-31)
If you make a mistake during dialling, press STOP to return to standby and
start again.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you use One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling with the time out feature on, the
fax will pause 5 seconds before it starts scanning the document. (Q16-11)
3. To start scanning right away, press START/SCAN.
If you use One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling, wait for the fax to start
scanning automatically.
The timeout feature can be turned off. (Q16-11)
You can start sending a document while it is being scanned into the memory.
When scanning a multi-page document if the telephone line is free, the unit
will call the other party after the first page is scanned. Once the connection is
made, the fax unit will begin to transmit the information while the remaining
pages are being scanned. This feature is called Quick-on-line TX and can be
turned off and on. (Q16-10)
When the fax sends a document, messages report the following information
about the transmission.
Transaction number
TRANSMIT
0031
Transaction Number
SCANNING DOC. P.001
A transaction number is assigned to every document sent from your fax
starting with 0001 up to 4999. When the number 4999 is reached, numbering
will begin again from 0001.
Other party’s fax number and name
26/12 ’97 FRI 23:01
DIALLING
26/12 ’97 FRI 23:01
123 4567
26/12 ’97 FRI 23:01
CALLING
123 4567
26/12 ’97 FRI 23:01
TX/RX NO. 0031
26/12 ’97 FRI 23:01
CANON CANADA
Displayed only if the other party’s telephone number and name are registered
for the speed dialling button used to dial the number.
6-12
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ECM transmission mode
26/12 ’97 FRI 23:05
ECM TX
Unless this feature has been turned off, the document is sent in the ECM
(error correction mode) for transmission. (Q16-9)
Successful completion
26/12 ’97 FRI 23:05
TRANSMITTING OK
26/12 ’97 FRI 23:05
TX/RX NO.
0031
Alternating messages tell you the transmission was successful. The message
will disappear after approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission error
If a transmission error occurs, read the error message in the display and look
it up in the error message table. (Q15-24)
Direct Sending
The fax dials the number, connects the call, and then scans and sends the
document one page at a time. Direct sending is slower than memory sending, but
because this method bypasses memory you can send a document ahead of other
documents stored in the memory.
Send
½
½
Direct sending scans and sends each page one at a time.
With direct sending you can watch each page as it is scanned and sent.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
½
Although direct sending is slower than memory sending, you can use direct
sending when you need to send an urgent document ahead of other
documents stored in the memory.
You can also use direct sending when the memory is full and there is no space
to hold another document in memory.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
2. Press DIRECT TX.
DIRECT TX
The DIRECT TX lamp lights. The fax is now in the direct sending mode.
3. Dial the other party’s fax number.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (Q6-7)
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
-or-
PQRS
WXYZ
Press a One-touch Speed Dialling button to dial the number. (Q4-26)
-or-
Press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code to dial the number. (Q4-28)
-or-
Press DIRECTORY and search for the name to dial the number. (Q4-31)
If you make a mistake during dialling, press STOP to return to standby and
start again.
4. Press START/SCAN.
The fax dials the other party’s number and sends the fax. Each page is sent as
it is scanned.
A series of messages report the other party’s name, telephone number, and
transaction number in the LCD display. The final message reports successful
transmission.
26/12 ’97 FRI 12:05
TRANSMITTING OK
5. Press DIRECT TX to turn off the direct sending mode.
DIRECT TX
6-14
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Sending
Manual sending allows you to talk to the other party before you send the
document. This method is useful if the operator of the other fax must manually
set the other fax to receive before it can receive a document.
The handset is available as an option. (Q2-9)
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can not set sender’s name when sending manually.
2. Press HOOK.
After you press HOOK the IN USE lamp lights and you will be able to hear
the dial tone.
-or-
Without pressing HOOK, just pick up the handset if you have installed the
optional handset.
3. Dial the other party’s fax number.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (Q6-7)
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
-or-
PQRS
Press a One-touch Speed Dialling button to dial the number. (Q4-26)
-or-
Press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code to dial the number. (Q4-28)
-or-
Press DIRECTORY and search for the name to dial the number and then
press START/SCAN. (Q4-31)
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you make a mistake during dialling, press STOP to return to standby and
start again.
4. When you hear the other party answer the call, you can talk.
When you hear the other party answer, pick up the handset so you can talk if
you have not already done so. Then go to step 5.
-or-
If you hear a high pitched signal, instead of the other party’s voice, they are
ready to receive your document. Go to step 7.
5. Ask the other party to press the start button on their fax and then hang up
their handset.
6. After the other party presses the start button on their fax, you will hear a
high pitched signal.
7. Press START/SCAN on your fax and hang up your handset.
The fax begins to send the document. If the offhook alarm starts beeping,
make sure the handset is resting properly on the handset cradle.
Re-dialling When the Line is Busy
If the other party’s line is busy or if there is no answer, the fax waits two minutes
and then dials the same number again. This feature is called automatic redialling.
What is Automatic Redialling?
After the initial dial attempt, the fax will wait two minutes and try to dial again.
If the second attempt fails, the fax will again wait for two minutes and make a
final attempt to complete the call.
Auto redial can be turned off and on. The number of redialling attempts and the
time interval between attempts can be set up with the auto redial feature.
(Q6-10)
6-16
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the fax is waiting to redial, the following messages are displayed
alternately:
26/12 ’97 FRI 09:30
AUTO REDIAL
26/12 ’97 FRI 09:30
TX/RX NO.
3888
If both redial attempts are unsuccessful the fax will cancel the transaction, display
the following message, and print an Activity Report to remind you that the
transmission was not completed.
26/12 ’97 FRI 09:30
BUSY/NO SIGNAL
To cancel redialling
If you are using direct sending, press STOP.
-or-
DELETE FILE
If you are using memory sending, press DELETE FILE.
To resend the document in the memory
Use the MEMORY REFERENCE button to resend the document. (Q8-6)
MEMORY REFERENCE
To erase the document from the memory
Use the DELETE FILE button to delete the file from the memory. (Q8-9)
DELETE FILE
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Redialling
Follow this procedure to set up these redialling features:
½
½
½
The number of times the fax attempts to redial.
The length of the time interval the fax waits between dialling attempts.
Re-sending method after an error occurs.
1. Open the TX SETTINGS menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
3.TX SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TX SETTINGS
3.AUTO REDIAL
SET
Press SET.
AUTO REDIAL
ON
6-18
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If OFF is displayed, press the search buttons until you see ON.
Press SET.
SET
SET
3. Press the search buttons to display the item you want to set up, then Press
SET.
4. Press STOP to return to standby.
Auto Redial Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you change them.
1.REDIAL TIMES
Sets the number of times the fax attempts to dial a number before it
cancels the transaction automatically.
02TIMES
You can set between 01 to 10 dialling
attempts.
2.REDIAL INTERVAL
3.TX ERROR RESEND
Sets the length of time the fax waits between dialling attempts.
02MIN.
You can set the time interval between 02 to
99 minutes.
ON
Determines how the fax handles re-sending if
an error occurs.
RESEND TX FROM
Tells the fax how to handle re-sending after
an error occurs.
ERROR & 1ST PG
Re-sends from the
page where the error
occurred. It also re-
sends the first page of
the document.
ERROR PAGE
ALL PAGES
Re-sends from the
page where the error
occurred.
Re-sends all pages of
the document.
OFF
Turns off the “re-sending after an error
occurs” feature.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One
Location
Follow this procedure to scan a document once and send it to several locations.
With this sending method, called sequential broadcasting, you can send the same
document to a maximum of 210 locations.
If you frequently send the same document to several locations, use Group
Dialling. With Group Dialling you can register up to 199 facsimile numbers and
send the same document to these numbers at the press of only one or four
buttons. (Q4-22)
If you use sequential broadcasting frequently and you want to make sure that all
transactions are completed, assign the REPORT function to the PROGRAM
button. Then before you send a document, press PROGRAM to have the fax
unit print a Multi-transaction Report to confirm that the document was sent to all
the destinations. (Q12-4, 14-12)
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
2. Dial the telephone numbers by entering the numbers one right after the
other.
Following are the three methods you can use to enter the numbers for
Sequential Broadcasting:
01
Use the One-touch Speed Dialling buttons to dial up to 72 destinations.
TEL=
123 4567
72
01 CANON INC
Use the Coded Speed Dialling buttons to dial up to 128 destinations.
0
1
0
2
0
7
TEL=
123 4567
002 CANON INC CA
*
ABC
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use regular dialling with the numeric keypad to dial up to 10 destinations,
but make sure that you press SET after each number you enter with regular
dialling.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
JKL
PQRS
TUV
You can also press the REDIAL button to redial the last number dialled with
the numeric keypad.
6-20
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You must dial the second number within 5 seconds of dialling the first number.
All subsequent numbers must be dialled within 10 seconds. If you wait longer
than the timeout interval before dialling the next number, the fax will start
scanning the document. The timeout interval can be turned off. (Q16-11)
3. After you have entered all of the numbers, press START/SCAN.
Regardless of the order you used when dialling, the fax will send the document to
the locations you entered in this order: One-touch Speed Dialling numbers,
Coded Speed Dialling numbers, then regular dial numbers.
To cancel sequential broadcasting
To cancel a sequential broadcast, press STOP.
After CANCEL DURING TX/RX is displayed, press . All destinations are
*
cancelled.
Sending Documents at a Preset Time
Follow this procedure to set a time for sending. This feature is called delayed
sending or timer sending. Use timer sending to store a document in the memory
and then have it sent at a later time when telephone rates are lower.
You can set up to five documents for delayed sending.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DELAYED
TRANSMISSION.
DELAYED TX
SET TIME
DELAYED TRANSMISSION
17:30
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
3. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
½
½
Enter the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
Enter all the numbers, including zeros.
PQRS
DELAYED TX
SET TIME
23:05
SET
4. Press SET.
DELAYED TX
SELECT LOCATIONS
TEL=
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Dial the other party’s fax number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (Q6-7)
PQRS
WXYZ
-or-
Close the One-touch Speed Dialling panels and dial the other party’s fax
number by pressing a One-touch Speed Dialling button. (Q4-26)
-or-
Press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code to dial the number. (Q4-28)
-or-
Press DIRECTORY and search for the name to dial the number. (Q4-31)
If you make a mistake during dialling, press STOP to return to standby and
start again.
TEL= 1 123 4567
09 CALIFORNIA MRKTS
6-22
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can press more than one speed dialling button to send the document to more
than one location after the timer goes off. If you want to enter the numbers with
regular dialling for a sequential broadcast, make sure you press SET after every
number.
DELAYED TX
SENDER’S NAME
SENDER’S NAME
CANON DIV. #20
5. If you want to skip selecting a sender name, go to step 6.
-or-
TTI SELECTOR
If you want to select a sender name, press the TTI SELECTOR button until
you see the sender name you want to use.
You can also use the search buttons to scroll up or down the TTI list.
SENDER’S NAME
20
CANON FAX DIV.
SET
6. Press SET. The fax scans the document and stores it in the memory.
DELAYED TX
2339
SCANNING DOC. P.001
½
½
The fax will hold the document in the memory until the timer for the
document goes off. Then it will send the document to the destinations you
specified.
To cancel a document set for timer sending, use the DELETE FILE
button. (Q8-9)
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/
Password
You can send documents with ITU-T standard subaddresses and passwords. In
order for a transaction to succeed, the subaddresses and passwords on the
sending and receiving fax units must match. You can use two methods to send a
document with an ITU-T subaddress and password:
½
Press a One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling button registered for subaddress/
password sending.
½
Enter the subaddress and password with the SUBADDRESS and
PASSWORD buttons on the operation panel when you send the document.
Subaddress/Password Sending with Speed Dialling
If you register the subaddress and/or password for a One-touch or Coded Speed
Dialling button, the subaddress/password are entered for you automatically after
you press the speed dialling buttons. (Q4-6, 4-15)
1. To use subaddress/password sending with a speed dialling button, you must
first register the subaddress/password for the telephone number when you
register the number for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling. (Q4-6, 4-14)
2. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
01
3. Press the One-touch Speed Dialling button registered for subaddress/
password sending. (Q4-26)
72
-or-
Press the CODED DIAL button followed by the three-digit code for the
Coded Speed Dialling number registered for subaddress/password sending.
(Q4-28)
0
1
0
2
0
7
6-24
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-or-
Press DIRECTORY and search for the name to dial a number registered for
subaddress/password sending. (Q4-31)
4. Press START/SCAN.
TRANSMITTING
0010
SCANNING DOC. P.001
Subaddress/Password Sending with the Operation Panel
Buttons
Note these limitations on entering the subaddress/password with the
SUBADDRESS and PASSWORD buttons on the operation panel:
½
If you frequently need to use a subaddress/password to send a document to
more than one location, register the number, subaddress, and password for a
One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling button so you can use multiple
broadcasting. (Q6-20)
½
½
You can not use a One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling button for which TX
TYPE is set for anything other than REGULAR TX. (Q4-6, 4-14)
The password setting is optional but required if the other party has set a
password on the other fax unit.
Follow this procedure to send a document with a subaddress/password entered
with the SUBADDRESS and PASSWORD buttons on the operation panel.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
2. Dial the telephone number.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the telephone number, or
use the speed dialling buttons to dial.
PQRS
To dial with One-touch Speed dialling, press the One-touch Speed Dialling
button where the number is registered.
To dial with a Coded Speed Dialling, press CODED DIAL and then use the
numeric keypad to enter the three-digit dialling code.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Then press SET.
TEL=
123 4567
02 JOHN BARRISTER
3. Immediately after pressing SET, open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels
and press SUBADDRESS.
SUBADDRESS
SUBADDRESS
You must press SUBADDRESS within 5 seconds of pressing SET. If you wait
longer than the timeout interval before pressing SUBADDRESS, the fax will
start scanning the document. The timeout interval can be turned off. (Q16-11)
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T subaddress. Then
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
TEL=
123 4567
02 JOHN BARRISTER
PASSWORD
5. If you want to enter a password, press PASSWORD.
PASSWORD
You must press PASSWORD within 5 seconds of pressing SET. If you wait longer
than the timeout interval before pressing PASSWORD, the fax will start scanning
the document. The timeout interval can be turned off. (Q16-11)
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
SET
6. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T password. Then
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
GHI
MNO
6
PQRS
WXYZ
9
TEL= 123 4567
02 JOHN BARRISTER
6-26
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Press START/SCAN. The fax starts to scan the document.
TRANSMITTING
0021
SCANNING DOC. P.001
½
½
½
The fax dials the number and sends the document with the subaddress
and password you just entered.
To cancel the transmission, press STOP and press when you are
*
prompted to confirm the cancellation.
To cancel a transmission set for delayed or timer sending, use the
DELETE FILE button. (Q8-9)
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-28
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
This chapter describes the basic receive features.
You can receive document transmission automatically or manually. In the
automatic receive mode the fax will receive a document automatically.
In the manual receive mode, if you have installed the optional handset kit you
can answer the telephone by picking up the handset on the fax and pressing
START/SCAN to start receiving the fax. You can also start manual receiving
from an extension telephone with remote receiving.
In the last section of this chapter, we will show you how to put the fax unit in the
transfer mode and send all documents automatically to a fax at your home or at
another work site.
Receiving Documents Automatically ....................................................................... 7-2
Setting the Automatic Receive Mode ........................................................... 7-2
Messages Displayed When Receiving a Document .................................... 7-2
Turning on and Adjusting the Auto Switch Time ....................................... 7-4
Receiving Documents Manually with the Optional Handset ............................... 7-6
Receiving a Document Manually at the Fax ................................................ 7-6
Receiving a Document Manually with an Extension Telephone .............. 7-7
Changing the Remote Receive ID ................................................................ 7-8
Cancelling Receiving a Document ......................................................................... 7-10
Transferring Documents ........................................................................................... 7-11
Before You Set Up Document Transfer ..................................................... 7-11
Setting Up the Fax for Document Transfer ............................................... 7-12
Turning the Transfer Mode ON and OFF .................................................. 7-15
Changing the Transfer Settings .................................................................... 7-16
Cancelling the Transfer Settings .................................................................. 7-17
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Documents Automatically
After you take your fax out of the box and set it up, it is set to receive documents
automatically. Use automatic receiving for a fax on a dedicated telephone line
that you do not need for telephone voice communication.
Setting the Automatic Receive Mode
Check the indicator above the MANUAL RX button. When this indicator is off,
the fax is in the automatic receive mode.
MANUAL RX
When a fax document is sent to you, your fax unit receives the document
automatically. During receiving a series of brief messages report the progress of
the reception by displaying the transaction number, name and telephone of the
caller, and the transmission mode.
If you install the handset and you don’t want the fax to ring when the other party
sends to you, turn the ringer volume switch to OFF.
Messages Displayed When Receiving a Document
This is a summary of the messages you will see displayed while your fax is
receiving a document. While you are receiving a document, information about
the document and other party is displayed.
Receiving a transmission
26/12 ’97 FRI 23:31
RECEIVE
Transaction number
Every document is assigned a transaction number as soon as it is received.
26/12 ’97 FRI 12:20
TX/RX NO. 5001
Transaction Number
7-2
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Documents received are assigned transaction numbers in ascending order starting
with the number 5001 up to 9999. After 9999 is reached, numbering starts from
5001 again.
Other party’s fax number
The other party’s facsimile number is displayed only if it is registered on the
other party’s fax machine.
26/12 ’97 FRI 11:34
123 4567
Other party’s name
According to the type of machine the other party is using to send the document,
you may also see the other party’s name displayed alternately with the telephone
number.
26/12 ’97 FRI 11:34
CANON INC. K.SATO
ECM reception mode
26/12 ’97
ECM RX
FRI
P.001
If the other party’s fax supports ECM sending, your fax receives every document
in the error correction mode (ECM). (Q16-12)
Successful reception
You will see these alternating messages displayed after a document is successfully
received.
26/12 ’97 FRI 11:34
RECEPTION OK
26/12 ’97 FRI 11:34
TX/RX NO.
5011
You can also confirm reception of a document by printing an Activity Report or
an Activity Management Report. (Q14-7)
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receive error messages
Here are few of the most common error messages.
The fax has run out of paper while printing or copying a document:
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
Open the paper cassette and add paper to the paper cassette. As soon as you re-
fill the paper cassette and close it, the remainder of the document in the memory
is printed. (Q2-22)
The toner cartridge has run out of toner while printing or copying a document:
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
Open the printer cover and replace the toner cartridge. As soon as you close the
cover, the fax returns to standby and the remainder of the document in the
memory starts printing automatically. (Q15-14)
If you see any other error messages, note the message then look it up in the error
message table. (Q15-26)
Turning on and Adjusting the Auto Switch Time
If you have installed the optional handset or connected an extension telephone to
the fax machine, follow this procedure to set the ring time before the fax switches
automatically to the document receive mode while in the manual receive mode.
This allows more time for you to pick up the handset and answer the telephone
for voice communication before the fax switches to the receive mode.
1. Open the RX SETTINGS menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
DATA REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
7-4
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
4.RX SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
RX SETTINGS
1.ECM RX
2. Open the MANU/AUTO SWITCH menu.
Press the search button until you see the display below.
RX SETTINGS
2.MAN/AUTO SWITCH
SET
Press SET.
MAN/AUTO SWITCH
OFF
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MAN/AUTO SWITCH
ON
SET
Press SET.
F/T RING TIME
15SEC
3. Set the amount of time the fax waits before automatically switching to the
document receive mode.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a number for the time (01 to
99) in seconds.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
-or-
PQRS
WXYZ
Press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number setting.
SET
Press SET.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press STOP to return to standby.
5. Press MANUAL RX to put the fax in the manual receive mode whenever
you want to take advantage of the MAN/AUTO SWITCH feature. (Q16-12)
MANUAL RX
Receiving Documents Manually with the
Optional Handset
When you use manual receiving, this means you can monitor all incoming calls
yourself by picking up the handset every time the fax rings. If you pick up the
handset and determine the call is from another person, start your conversation. If
you hear a slow beep tone, this means the call is a fax transmission. To receive
the document, just press START/SCAN and then hang up the handset.
Receiving a Document Manually at the Fax
Follow this procedure to receive a document manually at the fax.
Before you can use this feature, you must install the optional handset kit or a
regular telephone. (Q2-20) Make sure the document is not set on the ADF.
1. Press MANUAL RX to set the fax in the manual receive mode. The
MANUAL RX indicator should be on.
MANUAL RX
2. Every time you hear the telephone ring, pick up the handset.
If you hear someone on the line, you can talk.
-or-
If you hear a slow beep tone, this means another fax is trying to send you a
document.
7-6
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press START/SCAN to start receiving the document. Then hang up the
handset by placing it back in the handset cradle. The fax will start to receive
the document.
The fax will make a beeping sound if the handset is not completely on its
handset cradle. This is called the offhook alarm. The offhook alarm can be
turned off. (Q16-6)
Receiving a Document Manually with an Extension
Telephone
You can connect one extension telephone to the facsimile unit. (Q2-22) When
the telephone rings with the fax in the manual receive mode, you can use the
extension telephone to start receiving the document without walking over to the
fax machine. This is called remote receiving.
1. Make sure the extension telephone is connected properly. (Q2-22)
2. Check the operation panel and make sure the fax is in the manual receive
mode. The MANUAL RX indicator should be on. If it is off, press MANUAL
MANUAL RX
RX to turn on the indicator and switch the fax into the manual receive mode.
3. When the connected extension phone rings, pick up the handset.
If you hear someone on the line, you can start talking to the other party.
-or-
If you hear a slow beep, dial 25 on the extension telephone and hang up to
start receiving the document.
You can change the number for the remote receiving ID (00 to 99), turn the
feature off, or set the fax to start receiving by just hanging up the handset. (Q7-6)
If you have set the fax to receive by hanging up, after hearing a slow-beep
tone, hang up the handset.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Remote Receive ID
Follow this procedure to change the remote receive ID or to set the fax to receive
a document by just hanging up the handset of the extension telephone.
1. Open the RX SETTINGS menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
4.RX SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
RX SETTINGS
1.ECM RX
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RX SETTINGS
3.REMOTE RX
SET
3. Press SET.
REMOTE RX
ID CALL#
7-8
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the search buttons to display the item you want to change.
ID CALL #
Allows you to pick up the handset of the extension
telephone connected to the fax and start receiving a
document by dialling the remote switching ID. The default
is 25, or you can set your own two-digit ID.
HOOK
OFF
Allows you to start receiving by just hanging up the
handset of the extension telephone connected to the fax.
Turns off the remote receive feature.
To change the ID call number
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REMOTE RX
ID CALL #
SET
Press SET.
REMOTE RX ID
25
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a new number (00 to 99) for
the ID.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
-or-
PQRS
WXYZ
Press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number.
SET
Then press SET.
To set the extension phone to hook document reception mode
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REMOTE RX
HOOK
SET
Press SET.
When the fax rings, pick up the handset of the extension telephone and hang
up the extension phone to start receiving.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn off remote receiving
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REMOTE RX
OFF
SET
Press SET.
5. Press STOP to return to standby.
Cancelling Receiving a Document
Follow this procedure to cancel receiving a document.
1. Visually check the display to confirm that a document is being received.
26/12 ’97 FRI 12:20
RECEIVE 5012
2. To cancel the reception, press STOP.
The following message is displayed:
CANCEL DURING TX/RX
YES=( ) NO=(#)
*
3. Press to cancel receiving the document or press # to let receiving continue.
*
or
After you press an alarm sounds, document reception is cancelled, and the
*
following messages are displayed.
26/12 ’97 FRI 12:25
STOP KEY PRESSED
26/12 ’97 FRI 12:25
TX/RX NO.
5012
If the receive report feature is on or set to PRINT ERROR ONLY, an RX
REPORT also prints. (Q16-7)
PRINTING REPORT
7-10
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26/12 ’97 13:23 FAX 212 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
RX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
INCOMPLETE RECEPTION
TX/RX NO
5025
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
1 213 978 3314
#005
BELZER, INC.
26/12 15:49
00’17”
USAGE T.
PGS.
0
RESULT
NG
0 STOP
Then the fax returns to standby.
Transferring Documents
The transfer mode tells the fax to receive documents and then transfer them
automatically to a fax at your home or at another work site. The day and time for
the fax unit to switch to the transfer mode can be pre-set. This feature is
especially convenient for receiving important documents coming from countries
overseas several time zones removed from your own.
Before You Set Up Document Transfer
Note these important points before you create a transfer setup file:
½
½
You can create only one transfer setup file.
In order for the fax unit to transfer documents to a destination you must
enter the destination telephone number of the fax unit with a speed dialling
button. This means the destination fax unit must be registered on the fax for
a One-touch Speed Dialling button or a Coded Speed Dialling code.
(Q4-6, 4-14)
½
You can set the fax to transfer documents only from selected originators. In
order to select an originator, you have to register the telephone number of
the originator’s fax unit on your fax unit for a One-touch Speed Dialling
button or a three-digit Coded Speed Dialling code. (Q4-6, 4-14)
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the Fax for Document Transfer
Follow the procedure below to create a file for switching the fax automatically
into the transfer mode.
1. Open the TRANSFER menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FILE SETTINGS
6.TRANSFER
SET
SET
Press SET.
TRANSFER
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press SET. Then press the search buttons to scroll the display so you can see
each setting.
SETUP FILE
1.FILE NAME
SETUP FILE
6.PRINT RX DOC.
7-12
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
3. Press SET then follow the summary in the table below to perform the
settings.
4. Press STOP to return to standby.
Transfer Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold below, remain in effect unless you change
them.
1.FILE NAME
Enter a file name up to 24 characters long.
2.SELECT LOCATIONS
Select the numbers of the fax machines where you want documents
transferred.
TEL =
Close the One-touch Speed Dialling panels
and press a One-touch Speed Dialling button
or press the CODED DIAL button followed
by a three-digit code for the Coded Speed
Dialling number to enter the number of the
fax machine where you want documents
transferred. The telephone number of the
destination fax must be registered for One-
touch or Coded Speed Dialling on your fax.
3.PASSWORD
0000-9999
Enter a four-digit number (0000-9999) to protect the transfer file
settings. Use of a password is recommended. This operation
password protects the transfer file from unauthorized access to your
settings. You will also need to enter this password when you put the
fax in the document transfer mode.
4.SELECT ORIG UNIT
Allows you to set the fax to receive and relay documents only from
originator fax units that you designate.
OFF
All fax transmissions are received and
transferred.
ON
The fax machine receives and transfers
transmissions only from fax units that you
designate by fax telephone number.
TEL =
Press the One-touch Speed Dialling button or
press the CODED DIAL button followed by
the three-digit code to designate the
originator fax machines for receive and
transfer. The telephone number of the
originator fax must be registered for One-
touch or Coded Speed Dialling on your fax.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transfer Setup Summary (Cont’d)
5.TIME SETUP*
Sets the time to move the fax into and out of the transfer mode. If
you do not set the timer, you can still switch the fax into the
transfer mode manually.
1.START TIME
Set a time to move the fax automatically into the transfer mode.
EVERY DAY
:
Sets the fax to move into the transfer mode
every day. You can set up to 5 starting times
for every day of the week.
SELECT DAYS
1.SUN to 7.SAT
:
Sets the fax to move into the transfer mode
only on selected days of the week.
You can set up to 5 starting times for the
selected days.
2.END TIME
Sets the time for the fax to leave the transfer mode and return to
the normal mode.
EVERY DAY
:
Sets the fax to move out of the transfer mode
every day. You can set up to 5 end times for
every day of the week.
SELECT DAYS
1.SUN to 7.SAT
:
Sets the fax to move out of the transfer mode
on selected days of the week. You can set up
to 5 end times for the selected days.
6.PRINT RX DOC.
Sets the fax to print a copy of the transferred document at the
transfer unit.
OFF
Received and transferred documents are not
printed at the transfer unit.
ON
A copy of every document received and
transferred is printed at the transfer unit.
# OF RX COPIES To enter the number of copies (01-99) use the
numeric keypad to enter the number or press
the search buttons to increase or decrease the
number and press SET.
*
The following settings are valid: You can set EVERY DAY for the start time and then use SELECT DAYS to set end times.
You can also set SELECT DAYS for start times and then use the EVERY DAY setting for the end time. However, you can
not set both EVERY DAY and SELECT DAYS for the start time or end time.
7-14
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning the Transfer Mode ON and OFF
You can use this procedure to move the fax into and out of the transfer mode if
the timer has not been set to switch the fax in and out of the transfer mode
automatically. If the timer has been set to move the fax into and out of the
transfer mode automatically, you can still use this procedure to put the fax in the
transfer mode before the timer switches the fax into the transfer mode.
Turning Transfer Mode ON
Follow this procedure to turn the transfer mode on manually at any time.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press TRANSFER.
PASSWORD
TRANSFER
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
SET
2. If you have registered a password, use the buttons on the numeric keypad to
enter your four-digit password, then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
GHI
MNO
6
PQRS
WXYZ
9
TRANSFER
The fax is now in the transfer mode and will transfer documents to the
destinations you specified in the transfer setup file.
Turning Transfer Mode OFF
Follow this procedure to turn the transfer mode off manually at any time.
TRANSFER
TRANSFER
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press TRANSFER.
PASSWORD
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
SET
2. If you have registered a password, use the numeric keypad to enter your four-
digit password, then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
GHI
MNO
6
PQRS
WXYZ
9
26/12 ’97 FRI 08:30
The fax is now in the standby mode and is ready for normal operation.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Transfer Settings
Follow this procedure to change settings in the transfer setup file.
1. Open the TRANSFER menu. (Q7-12)
TRANSFER
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TRANSFER
2.CHANGE DATA
SET
3. Press SET.
CHANGE DATA
PASSWORD
If you have not set the password, you can skip the next step.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit password
protecting the transfer setup file. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
5. Press the search buttons to display the desired setting.
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
CHANGE DATA
6.PRINT RX DOC.
SET
6. With the setting you want to change on the display, press SET.
7. To change the settings, follow the same procedures you used to set up the
transfer setup file. (Q7-12)
To delete any settings, press CLEAR and press SET.
8. Press STOP to return to standby.
7-16
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling the Transfer Settings
Follow this procedure to delete the transfer setup file and cancel the transfer
settings.
1. Open the TRANSFER menu. (Q7-12)
TRANSFER
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TRANSFER
3.DELETE FILE
SET
3. Press SET.
DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
If you have not set the password, you can skip the next step.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit password and
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
DELETE FILE
FILE DELETED
5. Press STOP to return to standby.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-18
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
This chapter shows you how to use the memory features of the fax unit.
Some operations require that a document reside in the memory before it is sent.
For example, if you scan a document and set the timer, it will wait in the memory
until it is time for the fax to send the document.
If you scan a document for polling sending, the document will wait in the
memory until it is requested for sending by a polling request from another fax.
While such documents are residing in memory, you can view their transaction
numbers, list them in a printout, delete them before they are sent, or re-route
them to another destination.
Using the Memory Features ...................................................................................... 8-1
When the Fax Displays RECEIVED IN MEMORY ............................................ 8-2
Displaying the Transaction History .......................................................................... 8-3
Printing a Memory List .............................................................................................. 8-4
Printing a Document in the Memory ....................................................................... 8-5
Re-sending a Document to the Same Destination ................................................. 8-6
Sending a Document in Memory to a Different Destination ............................... 8-7
Erasing a Document from the Memory ................................................................... 8-8
Deleting a Document with the DELETE FILE Button ............................ 8-9
Deleting a Document with the MEMORY REFERENCE Button ......... 8-9
Setting Up and Using a Memory Box .................................................................... 8-10
Before You Create Memory Boxes ............................................................. 8-11
When You Create a Memory Box ............................................................... 8-11
Creating a Memory Box ............................................................................... 8-13
Changing the Memory Box Settings ........................................................... 8-19
Cancelling a Memory Box ............................................................................ 8-21
Sending a Document Stored in the Memory Box ..................................... 8-22
Printing a Document Received in a Memory Box .................................... 8-23
What Happens to Memory after a Power Failure ................................................ 8-24
How Your Registered Data Is Protected ................................................... 8-24
About the Backup Battery ........................................................................... 8-25
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Fax Displays RECEIVED IN
MEMORY
If paper or toner runs out while you are receiving a document, the fax will
automatically store the unprinted pages of the document in the memory and
display these messages:
RECEIVED IN MEMORY
RECEPTION OK
26/12 ’97 FRI 12:30
TX/RX NO.
5033
1. Check the LCD display and the indicators below the display.
REC. PAPER
Add paper to the paper cassettes, if the REC. PAPER indicator is on and if
you see this message: (Q2-22)
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
CHANGE CARTRIDGE
Replace the toner cartridge if the CHANGE CARTRIDGE indicator is on
and if you see this message: (Q15-14)
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
2. As soon as you close the re-filled paper cassette, or close the printer cover
over the newly installed toner cartridge, the pages stored in the memory are
printed.
½
½
As each page is printed, it is deleted from the memory.
If the memory becomes full, you will not be able to receive the remaining
pages. Contact the other party and request that the document be sent
again.
½
The fax can store up to 80 A4-size pages* in the memory. With the
optional memory kit you can receive up to 592 pages in the memory. For
details about the optional memory kits, contact your authorized Canon
dealer.
½
A memory backup function is provided to save the contents of the
memory for up to approximately 12 hours during a power failure.
*
Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No. 1, Standard Mode.
8-2
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the Transaction History
Follow this procedure to display results of transactions. This feature is convenient
when you want to check the status of a transaction without printing an activity
management report.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels and press TRANSACTION.
TRANSACTION
2. Press the down arrow button to view the most recent transmission.
14:08 0015 TX OK
CANON CANADA
The most recent transmission is displayed first.
½
½
½
Press the up and down arrows to view the list of transactions.
All transmissions are displayed first, then the receptions are displayed.
The transaction numbers for documents sent, numbered 0001 to 4999, are
displayed then the transaction numbers for documents received,
numbered 5001 to 9999, are displayed. The transaction numbers are
stored in descending order, from the larger numbers to the smaller
numbers.
½
Note the following notations used to tell you about the status of the
transaction:
Notation
OK
Meaning
Document transaction has been completed.
Transaction failed.
NG
HOLDNG
Document is being held in the memory for delayed
sending or is waiting to be polled.
TRANSM
--:--
Document is currently being sent or received.
No time is displayed for a document currently being
sent or being stored in the memory for pending
transmission.
3. Press STOP to return to standby.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing a Memory List
Follow this procedure to print a list of all documents currently stored in the
memory.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press MEMORY
REFERENCE.
If no documents are currently stored in the memory, you will see this
message:
MEMORY REFERENCE
NO DOC. STORED
If documents are stored in the memory the first item on the MEMORY
REFERENCE menu is displayed.
MEMORY REFERENCE
1.DOC. MEMORY LIST
SET
2. Press SET to start printing the memory list.
PRINTING REPORT
26/12 ’97 15:03 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
DOC. MEMORY LIST
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
TX/RX NO
5443
MODE
DELAYED TX
CONNECTION TEL/ID
[#10] J.SMITH
PGS.
SET TIME
ST. TIME
00:33
SENDER NAME
R.LOUIS
5 26/12 17:40
8-4
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing a Document in the Memory
Follow this procedure to print a document in the memory.
To select a document for printing, you must know its transaction number. You
may want to print a memory list for reference. (Q8-5)
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press MEMORY
REFERENCE.
MEMORY REFERENCE
1.DOC. MEMORY LIST
MEMORY REFERENCE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MEMORY REFERENCE
3.PRINT DOCUMENT
SET
3. Press SET to set up to print.
PRINT DOCUMENT
TX/RX NO.
0002
Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the document
you want to print. Then press SET.
SET
PRINT 1ST PAGE ONLY?
YES=( ) NO=(#)
*
If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the document,
press the cursor buttons ( ).
Press to print only the first page of a multi-page document, or press # to
print the entire document.
*
or
TX/RX NO.
PRINTING
0358
P.001/001
4. Press STOP to return to standby.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re-sending a Document to the Same
Destination
Follow this procedure to re-send a document to the same destination.
The fax prints an error transmission report as soon as a transmission fails.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press MEMORY
REFERENCE.
MEMORY REFERENCE
1.DOC. MEMORY LIST
MEMORY REFERENCE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MEMORY REFERENCE
2.MEMORY RETRASMT
3. Press SET then select the document you want to send.
MEMORY RETRASMT
TX/RX NO. 0038
4. Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the document
you want to send. Then press SET.
SET
If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the document,
press the cursor buttons ( ).
The fax sends the document to the number of the failed transmission. After
the document is sent, it is erased from the memory.
8-6
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Document in Memory to a Different
Destination
Follow this procedure to select another destination for a document waiting for
timer sending or waiting to be polled. After the document is sent to another
destination, it is erased from the memory.
To select a document for sending, you must know its transaction number. You
may want to print a memory list for reference. (Q8-4)
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press MEMORY
REFERENCE.
MEMORY REFERENCE
1.DOC. MEMORY LIST
MEMORY REFERENCE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MEMORY REFERENCE
4.RESEND DOCUMENT
3. Press SET then select the document you want to send.
RESEND DOCUMENT
TX/RX NO.
0010
4. Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the document
you want to send. Then press SET.
SET
RESEND DOCUMENT
SELECT LOCATIONS
TEL=
If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the document,
press the cursor buttons ( ).
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Dial the fax number.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the telephone number and
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
-or-
Use One-touch Speed Dialling, Coded Speed Dialling, or Group Dialling to
dial the number.
SET
Press SET.
RESEND DOCUMENT
SENDER’S NAME
SENDER’S NAME
03 CANON INC.
6. Enter the sender’s name.
TTI SELECTOR
Press TTI SELECTOR and keep pressing it until the sender’s name you want
appears in the display. You can also use the search buttons to scroll up and
down the TTI list.
SENDER’S NAME
06 CANON: J.SMITH
SET
Press SET. The fax sends the document to the number you dialled. After the
document is sent, it is erased from the memory.
Erasing a Document from the Memory
Follow this procedure to erase a document from the memory. To delete a
document from the memory, you can use the DELETE FILE button or the
MEMORY REFERENCE button.
To select a document for deletion, you must know its transaction number. You
may want to print a memory list for reference. (Q8-4)
8-8
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Document with the DELETE FILE Button
DELETE FILE
1. Press DELETE FILE.
DELETE DOCUMENT
TX/RX NO.
0057
2. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels.
3. Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the document
you want to delete. Then press SET.
SET
OK TO DELETE?
YES=( ) NO=(#)
*
If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the document,
press the cursor buttons ( ) before pressing SET.
4. Press to delete the selected document or press # to cancel the deletion.
*
After you press the document is erased.
*
TX/RX NO.
0004
ERASING END
5. Press STOP to return to standby.
Deleting a Document with the MEMORY REFERENCE
Button
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press MEMORY
REFERENCE.
MEMORY REFERENCE
1.DOC. MEMORY LIST
MEMORY REFERENCE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MEMORY REFERENCE
5.DELETE DOCUMENT
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
3. Press SET.
DELETE DOCUMENT
TX/RX NO.
0001
4. Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the document
that you want to delete. Then press SET.
SET
If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the document,
press the cursor buttons ( ) before pressing SET. If the transaction is displayed
with a # mark, the document is being held in the memory for re-dialling and
sending.
OK TO DELETE?
YES=( ) NO=(#)
*
5. Press to delete the selected document or press # to cancel the deletion.
*
After you press , the document is erased.
*
TX/RX NO.
0004
ERASING END
6. Press STOP to return to standby.
Setting Up and Using a Memory Box
In this section we will show you how to set up a memory box and use it to send
and receive documents. A memory box is a location in the memory you can
create to store scanned or received documents for printing or transmitting to
other destinations. The main advantage to using the memory box for sending and
receiving is that you can handle all transmissions with ITU-T passwords and
subaddresses.
The ITU-T subaddress and password serve the same purpose as the bank account
number and a personal identification number on your bank card. Just as you can
not complete a bank transaction without your account number and your personal
identification number, you can not complete a memory box facsimile transaction
if the subaddress and password do not match.
8-10
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A subaddress or password can be up to 20 digits long and consists of numbers,
#, or spaces.
,
*
Before You Create Memory Boxes
Before you set up a memory box, there are a few things you should know about
the other party’s fax machine to ensure efficient transactions.
You have to know how the other party is using the subaddress and password:
½
½
½
If the other party has set a subaddress and password, you must register both a
subaddress and password for the memory box.
If the other party has set a subaddress only, then you must also register a
matching subaddress.
If the other party has set a password only, inform them that they must register
a subaddress, or a subaddress and password. Both fax units must register an
ITU-T subaddress.
For the most efficient use of the memory box, register the numbers of all parties
who will be receiving your documents or sending you documents for a One-touch
or Coded Speed Dialling number.
When You Create a Memory Box
This is a brief summary of what to do when you create or change settings for a
memory box.
Access settings
Main Settings
SET BOX #00
PASSWORD
1.FILE NAME
2.PASSWORD
3.SUBADDRESS
4.TX PASSWORD
5.RX PASSWORD
Feature settings
6.Receive
7.Transmit
8.Polling TX
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Access Settings
SET BOX
A two-digit code (00-99) you assign to the box to select it when you need to scan
documents into the box or to open it to view or change the settings. The box
number and file name appear in printed reports for reference.
PASSWORD
If you created a password when you created the memory box (below
2.PASSWORD), you will have to enter the password to see the rest of the
settings.
Main Settings
1.FILE NAME
A personal name you can assign to the memory box to identify it in printed
reports.
2.PASSWORD
A four-digit password you assign to the memory box to protect the settings from
unauthorized access. You must also use this password and the box number to
print documents stored in the memory box. Assigning a password is optional, but
strongly recommended, especially if you want to keep the memory box setup and
the documents you receive confidential.
3.SUBADDRESS
This is the ITU-T subaddress.
4.TX PASSWORD
This is your TX password. TX password is only for polling sending. Your TX
password must match the ITU-T password with which the other party calls you. If
they do not match the other party will not receive your document.
5.RX PASSWORD
This is your RX password. Your RX password must match the ITU-T password
assigned to documents that you receive. If the passwords do not match, your fax
will not receive the document.
TX Password
ITU-T Password
Other party’s fax
FAX-L800
RX Password
ITU-T Password
The main settings apply to all three features below, including RECEIVE,
TRANSMIT, and POLLING TX.
8-12
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature Settings
6.RECEIVE
Allows you to set up how documents are handled in the memory box after they
are received. You can set the memory box to check the ID (telephone number) of
the originator, and specify that the received document be held in the memory box
and not printed.
7.TRANSMIT
Allows you to set up memory box transmission. You can set the memory box to
relay documents immediately or store them in the memory box. You can set the
timer for all documents set for sending from the memory box.
8.POLLING TX
Allows you to set up the memory box as a polling station to hold scanned or
received documents in the memory box and wait for a polling request from
another fax. After the subaddress and passwords are matched, the stored
documents are sent to the polling fax.
Creating a Memory Box
Follow this procedure to create a memory box.
1. Open the MEMORY BOX menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Press the search buttons until you see MEMORY BOX.
FILE SETTINGS
3.MEMORY BOX
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET.
MEMORY BOX
1.SETUP FILE
2. Give the memory box a number.
Press SET.
SET
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit code for the
memory box.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
½
You can enter a number from 00 to 99 for the memory box number.
PQRS
WXYZ
You can also use the search buttons to change the number. Press the down
arrow to increase the number and the up arrow to decrease the number.
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
33
SET
Press SET.
3. Press the search buttons to display the desired setting.
SETUP FILE
1.FILE NAME
SETUP FILE
8.POLLING TX
SET
4. With the item displayed that you want to set press SET. Then perform the
settings as described in the summary below.
5. When you are finished setting up the memory box, press STOP to return to
standby.
8-14
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you change them.
1.FILE NAME
NAME
This setting allows you to enter a personal name for the memory box
that will appear in printed reports. Enter a name of up to 24 characters
and press SET.
2.PASSWORD
0000 to 9999
This operation password protects your memory box settings. After you
set this password, you will have to enter the password before you can
view or change the settings for the memory box. You will also have to
enter this password to print a document received in the memory box.
3.SUBADDRESS
4.TX PASSWORD
0-9, , #, spaces (20 digits)
*
The ITU-T subaddress for the memory box. This setting is not optional.
You must enter a subaddress here in order to use the memory box.
Enter a subaddress of up 20 digits long. In addition to numbers, the
subaddress may include , #, and spaces.
*
0-9, , #, spaces (20 digits)
*
The ITU-T standard TX password for your memory box. TX password
is only for polling sending. This password must match the ITU-T
password with which the other party calls you in order for the
transaction to succeed. If your TX password does not match the ITU-T
password on the other fax machine, your document will not be
received by the other party’s fax.
5.RX PASSWORD
0-9, , #, spaces (20 digits)
*
The ITU-T standard RX password for your memory box. This
password must match the ITU-T password sent with a document to
your fax in order for the transaction to succeed. If your RX password
does not match the TX password sent with the document from the
other party’s fax, your fax will not receive the document.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary (Cont’d)
6.RECEIVE
Determines whether or not the document is received in the memory
box and how it is received.
NO
Documents are not received in the memory box.
YES
Documents are received in the memory box and
you can do some additional settings to determine
how they are received. If selected, you can turn
on checking the originator, printing the
document, and printing method.
1.SELECT ORIG
UNIT
Determines whether your fax checks to make sure the originator of the
transmission is registered on your fax. To be registered on your fax, the
originator’s telephone number must be registered for a One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialling button on your fax unit.
OFF
Your fax receives an incoming document even if
the originator is not registered on your fax.
ON
Your fax will receive the document only if the
originator is registered for a One-Touch or
Coded Speed Dialling button on your fax unit.
TEL =
After you turn SELECT ORIG UNIT on, press
the appropriate One-touch Speed Dialling
button or press the CODED DIAL button
followed by the appropriate three-digit code to
register the number of the orginator and press
SET. In order to register the originator’s
telephone number, the number must be registered
for a One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling button.
2.PRINT RX DOC.
Determines whether to print a received document.
ON
Documents will be printed when they are
received in the memory box and you can set how
they will be printed.
OFF
Documents received in the memory box are not
printed.
1.PRINT METHOD
If you turn on PRINT RX DOC., you can also set the print method.
AUTO
A document will print automatically as soon as it
is received in the memory box.
MAN.
You will have to manually print documents
received in the memory box.
8-16
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary (Cont’d)
2.# OF RX COPIES 01 COPIES
If you turn on PRINT RX DOC., use this setting
to specify the number of copies you want to
print (01-99).
7.TRANSMIT
Determines whether to transmit documents from the memory box and
how they are to be transmitted.
NO
Documents are not transmitted from the
memory box.
YES
Documents are transmitted from the memory
box.
1.SELECT
LOCATIONS
Allows you to select the destinations of the documents to be
transmitted from the memory box. Press the appropriate One-touch
button or press the CODED DIAL button followed by the
appropriate three-digit code to enter numbers for dialling.
2.TX DOCUMENT
Determines whether to (1) transmit documents received in the
memory box from another fax or (2) transmit documents scanned into
the memory box.
1.RECEIVED
DOCUMENT
Sets the memory box to receive documents from other fax units and
transmit them to other destinations.
TRANSMIT
Documents received in the memory box can be
transmitted to other destinations.
NOT TRANSMIT Documents received in the memory box can not
be transmitted to other destinations.
TX REPORT
If you turn on TRANSMIT for RECEIVED DOCUMENT, you can
set the memory box to send a transaction report to the originator
every time it sends a received document to another destination. This
setting is effective only when 6.RECEIVE – 1.SELECT ORIG UNIT
is ON.
TRANSMIT
A transaction report for the transmission is sent
to the originator.
NOT TRANSMIT A transaction report for the transmission is not
sent to the originator.
2.SCAN
DOCUMENT
Determines whether to transmit documents scanned in the memory
box.
TRANSMIT
Documents scanned into the memory box are
transmitted.
NOT TRANSMIT Documents scanned into the memory box are
not transmitted.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary (Cont’d)
3.TX START TIME
Allows you to set the timer for the transmission of a document
received or scanned into the memory.
EVERYDAY
Enter the time (in 24-hour format) that you want to transmit the
documents from the memory box. You can set up to 5 times to
transmit documents every day.
SELECT DAYS
Select one or more days of the week to transmit documents from the
memory box. Enter the time (in 24-hour format) that you want to
transmit the documents from the memory box. You can set up to 5
times for each day you select.
8.POLLING TX
Determines whether the memory box is to be used as a polling box.
A polling box holds a document in the memory until the fax is polled
by another fax unit requesting that the document be sent.
NO
The memory box is not set up as a polling box.
The documents received or scanned into the
memory box are not sent in response to a
polling request from another fax unit.
YES
The memory box is set up as a polling box. The
documents received or scanned into the
memory box are sent in response to a polling
request from another fax unit.
1.ERASE AFTER TX
Determines whether the document is erased from the memory after
it is sent in response to a polling request.
ON
The document is erased after it is sent. The
memory box is polled and sends the document
only once.
OFF
The document is not erased after it is sent. The
memory box can be polled to send the
document indefinitely.
8-18
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary (Cont’d)
2.TX DOCUMENT
This setting determines which documents to send when the
memory box is polled: (1) only documents received in the
memory box or (2) only documents scanned into the memory box.
1.RECEIVED
DOCUMENT
Determines whether to transmit the documents received in the
memory box when the memory box is polled.
TRANSMIT
When the memory box is polled, documents
in the memory box received from other fax
units are sent.
NOT TRANSMIT When the memory box is polled, documents
in the memory box received from other fax
units are not sent.
2.SCAN
DOCUMENT
Determines whether to transmit the documents scanned into the
memory box when the memory box is polled.
TRANSMIT
When the memory box is polled, documents
scanned into the memory box are sent.
NOT TRANSMIT When the memory box is polled, documents
scanned into the memory box are not sent.
Changing the Memory Box Settings
Follow this procedure to change the memory box settings.
1. Open the MEMORY BOX menu. (Q8-13)
MEMORY BOX
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons to display CHANGE DATA.
MEMORY BOX
2.CHANGE DATA
SET
3. Press SET.
CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
00
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of the box you
want to change and press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CHANGE DATA
PASSWORD
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next step.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Enter the four-digit password protecting the memory box settings and press
SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
6. Press the search buttons to display the setting you want to change.
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
CHANGE DATA
8.POLLING TX
SET
7. With the setting you want to change on the display, press SET.
8. Follow the same procedures you used to set the initial settings or change the
defaults. (Q8-13)
If you want to change the operation password, first you will have to enter the old
password (it will not be displayed) and then enter the new password (it will be
displayed as you enter it.)
9. When you are finished making changes, press STOP to return to standby.
8-20
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling a Memory Box
Follow this procedure to cancel a memory box.
1. Open the MEMORY BOX menu. (Q8-13)
MEMORY BOX
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MEMORY BOX
3.DELETE FILE
SET
3. Press SET.
DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Enter the number of the box you want to delete and press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next step.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Enter the four-digit password protecting the memory box settings and press
SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
DELETE FILE
FILE DELETED
6. Press STOP to return to standby.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Document Stored in the Memory Box
Follow this procedure to store a document in the memory box for sending
according to the memory box setup. (Q8-13)
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
2. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press MEMORY BOX.
MEMORY BOX
1.MEMORY BOX TX
MEMORY BOX
SET
3. Press SET.
SUBADDRESS
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T subaddress of the
memory box. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
MEMORY BOX TX
SENDER’S NAME
SENDER’S NAME
CANON, INC.
TTI SELECTOR
5. Press TTI SELECTOR until you see the sender name you want to use. You
can also use the search buttons to scroll up and down the TTI list.
SENDER’S NAME
01 R.LOUIS
SET
6. Press SET.
TRANSMIT
0037
SCANNING DOC. P.001
The fax begins to scan the document.
The document is stored in the memory box and will be sent according to the
memory box settings. (Q8-13)
8-22
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing a Document Received in a Memory Box
Follow this procedure to print a document that has been received and stored in a
memory box according the memory box setup. (Q8-13)
You can use this procedure to print a document from the memory box only after
you have set PRINT RX DOC. to ON and set PRINT METHOD to MAN.
under the RECEIVE item of the memory box setup.
After the fax receives a document in a memory box, the fax displays a message
and prints a report, unless this feature has been turned off. (Q16-8)
PRINTING REPORT
26/12 ’97 16:00 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
MEMORY BOX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
BOX#
#66
FILE NAME
TX/RX NO
R.LOUIS
5028
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
USAGE T.
PGS.
444 536
#061348
CANON, INC.
26/12 11:00
00’55”
1
RESULT
OK
A message will alternate with the standby display (date and time) until you print
the document received in the memory box.
RECEIVED IN MEM. BOX
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press MEMORY BOX.
MEMORY BOX
1.MEMORY BOX TX
MEMORY BOX
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MEMORY BOX
2.MEMORY BOX RX
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
3. Press SET.
SUBADDRESS
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T subaddress of the
memory box holding the document you want to print. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
MEMORY BOX RX
PASSWORD
If you have not set the operation password, the documents starts printing.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Enter the four-digit operation password that protects the memory box setup
and press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
After you enter the operation password, the document starts printing.
MEMORY BOX RX
PRINTING
P.001/001
What Happens to Memory after a Power
Failure
If power to the fax is lost due to a power failure, or if the fax is accidentally
unplugged, a built-in battery keeps a trickle of current supplied to the memory so
all the documents currently stored in the memory can be saved for up to
approximately 12 hours.
How Your Registered Data Is Protected
This is what happens when the fax is disconnected:
½
The backup battery takes over and keeps a trickle of current flowing to the
memory in order to preserve all the documents in the memory waiting to be
sent or printed.
½
However, if the fax is left off for longer than approximately 12 hours, all
documents in the fax memory will be lost after the battery runs down, and as
soon as power is restored to the fax a Memory Clear List is printed that
shows you what documents were erased. (Q14-15)
8-24
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
½
Because your user data and speed dialling settings are constantly refreshed by
a lithium battery, they will not be lost as a result of a power failure, even if
power to the fax is cut off for longer than approximately 12 hours.
When many documents are stored in the fax memory, the fax may need about
2 minutes to recover after power is restored to the fax.
About the Backup Battery
Here is a list of things to keep in mind about the backup battery.
½
The backup battery that preserves document data in the memory for up to 12
hours in case of a power loss is a rechargeable battery, and it requires about 1
day to reach full charge after power to the fax unit is restored.
½
½
Frequently disconnecting the fax unit from the power source shortens the
service life of the battery.
To avoid shortening the backup battery service life, use the fax within a
temperature range of 10gC to 32.5gC. If the fax is used in an environment that
is too hot or too cold, this can shorten the service life of the backup battery.
½
If the backup battery can not preserve data even after you plug in the power
source and the fax is left on for 1 day (24 hours), call for service and have the
backup battery replaced.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-26
Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network
This chapter shows you how to relay documents and how to have documents
relayed for you.
You can set up your fax unit as a relay station to relay documents that you
receive, or you can send documents to another fax and have the documents
relayed for you.
What is Relay Broadcasting? .................................................................................... 9-2
Setting Up and Using a Standard Relay Unit ......................................................... 9-2
Setting Your Fax as a Relay Unit .................................................................. 9-3
Changing the Relay Broadcast Settings ....................................................... 9-6
Deleting the Relay Group .............................................................................. 9-7
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting ............................. 9-8
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialling ....................... 9-9
Sending with the RELAY BROADCAST Button ................................... 9-10
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is Relay Broadcasting?
In a relay broadcast, the originator fax unit sends a document over a long
distance to another fax called the relay unit. After the relay unit receives your
document, it automatically sends the document to several other fax units in the
local area. In this way you can send a document to several fax units in the same
locality with only one long distance transmission.
Originator
Relay Unit
In a relay network your fax unit can function as both an originator and a relay
unit. When your fax unit is the originator, it sends a document to a relay unit
from which the document is relayed to several destination in the same locality.
When your fax unit is the relay unit it receives a document from another party
and relays it to one or several other faxes in your own locality.
Setting Up and Using a Standard Relay Unit
In this section we will show you how to set up and manage a relay network with
the standard relay features provided on the fax.
Before you set up your fax to relay documents from the originator fax unit,
confirm the following points:
½
½
Make sure your unit telephone number is correctly registered. (Q3-11)
Make sure the telephone number of the originator fax unit is registered on
your fax for a speed dialling button. (Q14-2)
½
After your fax receives the document from the orginator it will relay the
document to one or several destination units. Make sure the telephone
numbers of all the destination units are registered on your unit for speed
dialling buttons. (Q14-2)
9-2
Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
½
Ask the originator if they would like to receive a report of successful
transmission after your fax relays the document.
Make sure the relay feature on your fax is turned on.
Follow the procedures in this section to set up your fax as a relay unit. When
your fax is the relay unit, it receives the document from the originator and relays
it to several other destinations.
Setting Your Fax as a Relay Unit
Follow this procedure to set your fax to participate in a relay network as a relay
unit.
1. Open the RELAY TX GROUP menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels and press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FILE SETTINGS
2.RELAY TX GROUP
SET
Press SET.
RELAY TX GROUP
1.SETUP FILE
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Give the relay group a number from 00 to 99.
Press SET.
SET
SETUP FILE
SET RLY TX GROUP# 00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit relay group
number and press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
1.GROUP DIAL NAME
Use the search buttons to display all the items in the menu.
SET
With the item displayed that you want to set, press SET. Then follow the
instructions in the table below to set up the relay group.
When you are finished, press STOP.
Relay Group Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you change them.
1.GROUP DIAL NAME
2.PASSWORD
Name (24 characters)
Enter a name for the relay group. The name can be up to 24-characters
long. Then press SET.
0000-9999
This is the four-digit password that protects the relay box settings you
are about to set up. After you set this password, you will have to enter
it every time you want to view or change these settings. Enter a four-
digit password and press SET.
3.SUBADDRESS
4.RX PASSWORD
20 digits ( # spaces)
*
This is the ITU-T subaddress. Enter a number up to 20 digits long (it
can include spaces and the symbols and #).
*
20 digits ( # spaces)
*
When your fax is the relay unit, this ITU-T password must match the
ITU-T password of the document sent from the orginator in order for
your fax to receive the document. Otherwise, your fax will not receive
the document. Enter a number up to 20 digits long (it can include
spaces and the symbols and #).
*
9-4
Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Group Setup Summary (Cont’d)
5.SELECT ORIG UNIT
When your fax is the relay unit, this feature forces your fax to
check the identity of the originator before it receives the document
for relay to other units.
ON
When your fax receives a document for relay,
it will check the identity of the originator
before it receives the document. In order for
this feature to perform correctly, the telephone
number of the orginator unit must be registered
correctly for speed dialling on your fax unit.
TEL =
OFF
Press the One-touch Speed Dialling button or
press the CODED DIAL button followed by
the three-digit code where the number for the
originator fax is registered and press SET.
Your fax will receive a document for relay
without checking the identity of the
originator.
6.PRINT RX DOC.
When your fax is the relay unit, this setting determines if your fax
unit prints a copy of every document that it relays.
OFF
Your fax does not print a copy of every
document it relays to other fax units.
ON
Your fax prints a copy of every document it
relays to other fax units.
7.SELECT LOCATIONS
This item allows you to select the fax units to receive the document
your unit relays. The number of fax units to receive the document
must be registered for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling. You can
not enter a number with regular dialling.
TEL =
Close the One-touch Speed Dialling panels
and press the speed dialling buttons where the
numbers of the fax units to receive the relay
broadcast are registered then press SET. You
can select up to 200 destinations.
8.TX REPORT
This feature determines if your fax unit returns a relay transmission
report to the originator after your fax unit receives and relays a
document.
TRANSMIT
After your fax unit relays a document, it sends
a transmission report back to the originator.
In order for the feature to perform correctly,
the originator’s unit telephone number must be
registered on your fax for One-touch or Coded
Speed Dialling.
NOT TRANSMIT
No relay transmission report is sent to the
originator after a document has been relayed.
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Group Setup Summary (Cont’d)
9.TX START TIME
You can set your fax to hold documents and then relay them at a
preset time. If you do not set this item, all documents received for
relay are relayed immediately. If you want to use this feature, press
SET.
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time in 24-hour
format. You can set up to 5 times to relay documents within a 24-hour
period every day.
10.RELAY B’CAST
This feature switches relay broadcasting for this group on and off
without altering any of the other settings.
ON
Your fax unit receives and relay a document set
for relay broadcasting.
OFF
Your fax unit will not receive and relay a
document set for relay broadcasting
Changing the Relay Broadcast Settings
Follow this procedure to change the relay broadcast settings.
½
If you want to add to the list of fax units to receive relay broadcasts from
your fax unit, make sure that the numbers you want to add are registered for
One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling.
½
If you want to set your fax unit to confirm the identity of the originator
before it receives a document for relay broadcasting, make sure the telephone
number of the originator’s fax unit is registered for One-touch or Coded
Speed Dialling on your fax unit.
1. Open the RELAY TX GROUP menu. (Q9-3)
RELAY TX GROUP
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RELAY TX GROUP
2.CHANGE DATA
SET
3. Press SET.
CHANGE DATA
SET RLY TX GROUP# 00
9-6
Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the group number. Then
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CHANGE DATA
PASSWORD
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next step.
5. Enter the four-digit operation password and press SET.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CHANGE DATA
1.GROUP DIAL NAME
6. Press the search buttons to display the item you want to change and press
SET.
SET
½
To change the settings for an item, follow the same procedures you used
for initial setup of the relay group. (Q9-3)
½
½
To delete an item, press CLEAR and then press SET.
To turn off the relay feature for the group and retain the setup, press the
search buttons to display 10.RELAY B’CAST, press SET, and turn this
feature off. You do not have to delete the relay group to disable it
temporarily.
½
To change the operation password, first you have to enter the old
password (it is not displayed as you enter it) and then you have to enter
the new password (it is displayed as you enter it).
7. When you are finished making changes, press STOP to return to standby.
Deleting the Relay Group
Follow this procedure to delete the relay group and all of its settings.
1. Open the RELAY TX GROUP menu. (Q9-3)
RELAY TX GROUP
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RELAY TX GROUP
3.DELETE FILE
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET.
DELETE FILE
SET RLY TX GROUP# 00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
3. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the relay group number then
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next step.
4. Enter the four-digit operation password and press SET.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
DELETE FILE
FILE DELETED
5. Press STOP to return to standby.
If the relay has been set for timer sending and the document is still in the
memory, you will not be able to delete the relay group until the document is
sent. In this case the fax will prompt:
CAN NOT DELETE
Wait until the document is sent before you attempt to delete the relay group.
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay
Broadcasting
Follow this procedure to send a document to a relay unit.
In this procedure your fax is the originator.
Before you send a document to another fax for relay broadcasting, confirm the
following points on your fax:
½
Make sure your own fax unit telephone number are correctly registered.
(Q3-11)
½
Enter a subaddress.
9-8
Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you send a document to another fax for relay broadcasting, contact the
other party and confirm the following points about their fax:
½
½
The relay unit must support ITU-T subaddress/password transactions.
If you want a relay transmission report sent back to your fax from the relay
unit, instruct the relay unit to turn this feature on when they set up the relay
function on their fax.
½
Make sure the relay unit has registered the telephone numbers of all
destinations for the speed dialling buttons of the relay unit.
½
½
Make sure you have the correct subaddress for the other party’s fax.
Confirm that the subaddress you have been given has been used to set up the
other party’s fax as a relay station. Your fax can not confirm whether or not
the other party’s fax has been set up properly as a relay unit.
½
If an ITU-T password is set on the other party’s fax you must send the
document with a password. Otherwise, the other fax will not receive your
document.
After the relay fax is set up to participate in a relay network, it should receive
and relay documents automatically. By following the initial setup procedures in
the previous section, the relay fax unit can be set to confirm the identity of the
originator before sending and to send a relay transmission report to the
originator after your fax unit requests the other unit to relay a document.
When your fax unit is the originator of a relay transmission with this method, it
does not check to ensure that the fax to receive and relay the transmission is set
up properly for relay transmission. Even when the fax is not set up to relay your
documents, your fax unit reports such a transmission as a successful relay
transmission. Make sure the relay unit is set up correctly to relay documents that
it receives from your fax unit.
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialling
You can register a telephone number for relay sending under a One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialling button.
Check these points before you send a document to another party for relay:
½
Contact the other party and ask for the ITU-T subaddress and password they
are using for receiving documents to relay.
½
The other party’s fax unit does not have to be a Canon fax unit, but make
sure the other party’s fax unit supports the use of ITU-T subaddresses and
passwords.
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
½
Perform the procedure to register a telephone number for One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialling. (Q4-6, 4-14) If the speed dialling buttons are already
set up, perform the procedure to change the One-touch or Coded Speed
Dialling settings. (Q4-6, 4-14)
When you do the speed dialling settings, turn on the OPTIONAL SETTING
feature and select TX TYPE. Select ORIG RELAY TX and then set the
ITU-T subaddress and password. (Q4-11, 4-19) Confirm that the other party
is set up properly to relay documents received from your fax. Your fax can
not confirm whether or not the other fax has been set up properly for
relaying a document sent from your fax.
Sending with the RELAY BROADCAST Button
Follow this procedure to send the original document for a relay broadcast with
the RELAY BROADCAST button.
You can set only one destination.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
2. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels and press RELAY
BROADCAST.
ORG RELAY TX
SELECT LOCATIONS
RELAY BROADCAST
TEL=
3. Dial the relay units.
Use regular dialling. (Q6-7)
-or-
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
Press a One-touch Speed Dialling button, or press CODED DIAL followed
by a three-digit code. (Q4-26, 4-28)
9-10
Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-or-
Dial the number with directory dialling. (Q4-31)
TEL=
123 4567
01 CANON, INC.
SET
Press SET.
SUBADDRESS
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Enter the ITU-T subaddress required to start the relay broadcast on the
other party’s fax. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
TEL=
123 4567
01 CANON, INC.
If a password is not required go on to the next step.
-or-
PASSWORD
If an ITU-T password is also required to start the relay broadcast, press
PASSWORD.
PASSWORD
You must press PASSWORD within 5 seconds of pressing SET. If you wait longer
than the timeout interval before pressing PASSWORD, the fax will start scanning
the document. The timeout interval can be turned off. (Q16-11)
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
SET
Enter the ITU-T password required to start the relay broadcast on the other
party’s fax. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
GHI
MNO
6
PQRS
WXYZ
9
TEL=
123 4567
01 CANON, INC.
5. Press START/SCAN to start the transmission.
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes
This chapter shows you how to send and receive confidential documents.
A confidential document is a document that does not print as soon as it is
received. The receiving party must use a password to unlock his or her mailbox in
order to print the document. Use confidential sending and receiving for
documents that you want only the person with the correct password to read.
You can not use the conventional Canon confidential mailbox feature.
Setting Up and Using the Standard Mailbox Features ........................................ 10-2
Creating a Mailbox ........................................................................................ 10-2
Changing Mailbox Settings .......................................................................... 10-5
Cancelling a Mailbox .................................................................................... 10-6
Receiving a Confidential Document ........................................................... 10-7
Sending a Confidential Document .......................................................................... 10-9
Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialling ........................... 10-9
Sending a Confidential Document with the Confidential Mailbox
Button ........................................................................................................... 10-10
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up and Using the Standard Mailbox
Features
In this section we will describe how to create your own mailbox, change the
mailbox settings when necessary, and delete the mailbox when it is no longer
needed.
Creating a Mailbox
Follow this procedure to create a mailbox to hold confidential documents in a
private mailbox protected with a password.
1. Open the CONFID. MAILBOX menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
SET
Press SET.
CONFID. MAILBOX
1.SETUP FILE
2. Give the mailbox a number.
SET
Press SET.
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
10-2
Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit code for the
confidential mailbox number. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
1.FILE NAME
SET
Press SET.
FILE NAME
:A
3. Give the mailbox a name to identify it in printed reports.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a personal name for the
mailbox. The name can be up to 24 characters long and may include numbers,
symbols, and spaces. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
2.PASSWORD
4. Give the mailbox a password to protect the mailbox content and settings from
unauthorized access.
SET
Press SET.
PASSWORD
½
½
This password protects the confidential mailbox settings from
unauthorized access. The next time you want to open this menu to view
the settings or make any changes, you will have to enter this password to
open the menu.
You will have to enter this password to print documents you receive in
your mailbox. Do not forget your password.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit password. Then
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
3.SUBADDRESS
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Give the mailbox an ITU-T subaddress.
Press SET.
SET
SUBADDRESS
This item is the ITU-T standard subaddress. This setting is required. All
confidential documents sent to you must be sent with this subaddress in order
to be stored in your mailbox. If the subaddresses do not match, the document
will not be received.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter an ITU-T subaddress up to
20-digits long. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
4.RX PASSWORD
This next setting is optional. If you set a password, however, the confidential
documents sent to you must also include this password.
SET
6. To enter an ITU-T password, press SET.
RX PASSWORD
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter an ITU-T password up to 20-
digits long. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
5.# OF RX COPIES
7. Normally only one copy of a document received in a confidential mailbox is
printed. If you want to print more copies, change this settings. Otherwise, go
on to the next step.
SET
To specify more copies, press SET.
# OF RX COPIES
01COPIES
Press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number.
10-4
Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-or-
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit code. For
numbers 00 to 99 you must enter 2 digits, including the zero.
SET
Press SET.
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
8. You can repeat this procedure to set up another mailbox.
-or-
Press STOP to return to standby.
Changing Mailbox Settings
Follow this procedure to change the settings for a mailbox. To open the mailbox
to view and change the settings, you must know the mailbox number and
password.
1. Open the CONFID. MAILBOX menu. (Q10-2)
CONFID. MAILBOX
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
CONFID. MAILBOX
2.CHANGE DATA
3. Open the mailbox with its number and password.
Press SET.
SET
CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit code of the
mailbox you want to change. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CHANGE DATA
PASSWORD
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit password
protecting access to the mailbox. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
4. Press the search buttons to display the item you want to change.
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
CHANGE DATA
5.# OF RX COPIES
SET
5. With the item you want to change shown in the display, press SET.
6. To change an item, follow the same procedures you used to perform the
initial settings. (Q10-2)
7. Press STOP to return to standby.
Cancelling a Mailbox
Follow this procedure to cancel a mailbox.
1. Open the CONFID. MAILBOX menu. (Q10-2)
CONFID. MAILBOX
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
CONFID. MAILBOX
3.DELETE FILE
SET
3. Press SET.
DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
00
10-6
Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of the mailbox
you want to delete. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit password
protecting the mailbox you want to delete. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
DELETE FILE
FILE DELETED
6. Press STOP to return to standby.
Receiving a Confidential Document
When the fax receives a confidential document with a subaddress or subaddress
and password that match the subaddress/password settings for your confidential
mailbox, the document is stored in the mailbox.
After the fax unit receives a document in a confidential mailbox, it displays a
message and prints a report.
PRINTING REPORT
26/12 ’97 14:26 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
CONFID. RX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
CONFID.MBOX#
#01
CONFID.MBOX NAME
TX/RX NO
LOUIS
5028
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
444 5380
1234
JOHN BARRISTER
26/12 13:13
USAGE T
PGS.
00’56
1
RESULT
OK
½
½
The report lists the subaddress where the documents have been received.
Printing this Confidential Receive Report every time you receive a
confidential document can be turned off and on. (Q16-8)
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the report prints, a message alternates with the standby display (date and
time) until you print the report received in the mailbox.
RECEIVED IN MAILBOX
Follow this procedure to print a document received in a confidential mailbox.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press CONFIDENTIAL
MAILBOX.
CONFID. TX/RX
1.CONFIDENTIAL TX
CONFIDENTIAL MAILBOX
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
CONFID. TX/RX
2.CONFIDENTIAL RX
SET
3. Press SET.
SUBADDRESS
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the subaddress for the
mailbox. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CONFIDENTIAL RX
PASSWORD
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit password to
open the mailbox. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
To protect your password, it is not displayed when you enter it.
The document starts printing.
CONFIDENTIAL RX
PRINTING
P.001/002
10-8
Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Confidential Document
Sending a document with a subaddress and password does not ensure that the
document will be received as a confidential document. Before your fax sends a
document, it can not confirm that the other party has their fax set up for
confidential receiving.
You can use two methods to send a confidential document:
½
½
If you frequently use the confidential sending feature, you can register a
telephone number for confidential sending with One-touch or Coded Speed
Dialling registration.
You can also enter the ITU-T subaddress and password with
CONFIDENTIAL MAILBOX button.
Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialling
You can register a telephone number for confidential sending at the touch of a
One-touch Speed Dialling button or by pressing CODED DIAL followed by a
three-digit code.
Check these points before you send a confidential document to another party:
½
Contact the other party and ask for the ITU-T subaddress and password they
are using for receiving confidential documents.
½
The other party’s fax unit does not have to be a Canon fax unit, but make
sure the other party’s fax unit supports the use of ITU-T subaddresses and
passwords.
½
½
½
Perform the procedure to register a telephone number for One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialling. (Q4-6, 4-14)
If the speed dialling buttons are already set up, perform the procedure to
change the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling settings. (Q4-6, 4-14)
When you do the speed dialling settings, turn on the OPTIONAL SETTING
feature and select TX TYPE. Select CONFIDENTIAL TX and then set the
ITU-T subaddress and password. (Q4-6, 4-14)
½
Confirm that the other party has set up a confidential mailbox with the
subaddress you have been given. Your fax can not confirm whether or not the
subaddress has been used to set up a confidential mailbox.
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Confidential Document with the Confidential
Mailbox Button
Note these points about sending a confidential document to a confidential
mailbox.
½
½
You can dial only one telephone number.
If you frequently need to send a confidential document to more than one
location, register the number, subaddress, and password for One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialling so you can use multiple broadcasting. (Q4-6, 4-14)
½
½
If you use One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling to dial the number after you
perform the following operation, the transmission mode settings registered
for the speed dialling button are ignored.
The password setting is optional but required if the other party has set a
password on the other fax unit.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
2. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels and press CONFIDENTIAL
MAILBOX.
CONFID. TX/RX
CONFIDENTIAL MAILBOX
SET
1.CONFIDENTIAL TX
3. Press SET.
CONFIDENTIAL TX
SELECT LOCATIONS
TEL=
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (Q6-7)
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
-or-
PQRS
Close the One-touch Speed Dialling panels and press a One-touch Speed
dialling button to dial the number, or press CODED DIAL and enter the
three-digit code. (Q4-26, 4-28)
10-10 Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-or-
Dial the number with directory dialling. (Q4-31)
½
½
You can dial only one number.
The transmission mode settings for the speed dialling button are ignored.
SET
Press SET.
SUBADDRESS
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T subaddress. Then
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
TEL=
123 4567
CANON, INC.
PASSWORD
6. If you must also enter an ITU-T password, press PASSWORD. Otherwise,
just go on to the next step.
PASSWORD
You must press PASSWORD within 5 seconds of pressing SET. If you wait longer
than the timeout interval before pressing PASSWORD, the fax will start scanning
the document. The timeout interval can be turned off. (Q16-11)
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T password. Then
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
GHI
MNO
6
PQRS
WXYZ
9
TEL=
123 4567
01 CANON, INC.
7. Press START/SCAN to start the transmission.
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes 10-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12 Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling
This chapter shows you how to set up and use polling sending and receiving.
Polling is useful when one or both parties can not be in the office at the same
time.
What’s Polling? .......................................................................................................... 11-2
Before You Use Polling Receiving .............................................................. 11-2
Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive a Document .......................................... 11-3
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time ............................................................ 11-5
Changing the Preset Polling Settings ........................................................ 11-11
Cancelling Preset Polling ............................................................................ 11-12
Setting Up Polling Sending .................................................................................... 11-13
Before You Can Be Polled to Send ........................................................... 11-13
Setting Up a Polling Box ............................................................................ 11-13
Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling Sending ................ 11-17
Changing the Polling Box Setup ................................................................ 11-19
Cancelling a Polling Box ............................................................................. 11-20
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What’s Polling?
Polling means a fax calls another fax and requests that the other fax send a
document that it is holding. Unlike normal sending and receiving, in polling the
receiver always calls the sender. This is called polling to receive a document. The
sender sends the document in response to the polling by a telephone call from
the receiver.
Your fax can be set up to function in both roles. Your fax can poll to receive a
document, or it can be polled to send a document that it is holding.
Before You Use Polling Receiving
Before you try to set up polling, note the following points:
½
With one operation you can poll several faxes. You can dial up to 210
telephone numbers and poll those faxes to receive documents that they are
holding.
½
½
You can poll a document at any time, but you may find it more useful to set
your fax for polling other faxes at specified times throughout the day. (Q11-5)
You must know if the other fax is holding the document under both a
subaddress and password or only a subaddress or password. You must also
know the subaddress and password so you can enter them on your fax. If you
do not know the subaddress or password, contact the other party.
½
½
If the other party’s document(s) are registered for polling without a
subaddress or password, you can still perform polling receiving.
If the other party’s fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions, you can ask them to set the polling ID to 255 or 1111 1111
binary when the other party’s fax machine is a Canon fax.
11-2
Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive a
Document
Follow this procedure to poll another fax to receive the document that it is
holding. This procedure starts polling the other fax immediately. You can also set
the fax to poll at a preset time. (Q11-5)
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press POLLING.
POLLING
1.POLLING TX
POLLING
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
POLLING
2.POLLING RX
SET
3. Press SET.
TEL=
TTI SELECTOR
You can select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
4. Close both One-touch Speed Dialling panels and dial the other party’s
number.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. If you use regular
dialling, make sure you press SET after you dial the number. (Q6-7)
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
-or-
Press a One-touch Speed Dialling button to dial the number. (Q4-26)
-or-
Press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code to dial the number. (Q4-28)
-or-
Dial the number with directory dialling. (Q4-31)
If you make a mistake during dialling, press STOP to return to standby and
start again.
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to receive a document from a fax unit that does not support
ITU-T subaddress/password transactions, press START/SCAN.
-or-
If you want to receive a document from a fax unit that supports ITU-T
transactions, press SET. Then press the SUBADDRESS button.
SUBADDRESS
You must press SUBADDRESS within 5 seconds of pressing SET. If you wait
longer than the timeout interval before pressing SUBADDRESS, the fax will
start scanning the document. The timeout interval can be turned off. (Q16-11)
An ITU-T subaddress is a number up to 20 digits long which can include
spaces and the symbols and #.
*
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T subaddress. Then
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
TEL=
123 4567
01 CANON, INC.
PASSWORD
6. If you must also enter an ITU-T password, press the PASSWORD button.
Otherwise, go on to the next step.
PASSWORD
You must press PASSWORD within 5 seconds of SET. If you wait longer than
the timeout interval before pressing PASSWORD, the fax will start scanning the
document. The timeout interval can be turned off. (Q16-11)
An ITU-T password is a number up to 20 digits long which can include spaces
and the symbols and #.
*
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T password. Then
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
GHI
MNO
6
PQRS
WXYZ
9
TEL=
123 4567
01 CANON, INC.
11-4
Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Press START/SCAN to start polling the other faxes.
½
If the other document is holding the document under a subaddress, your
subaddress must match the other party’s subaddress.
½
If the other document is holding the document under both a subaddress
and password, then you must poll the fax with both a matching
subaddress and password.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Follow this procedure to set the fax to poll another fax at a preset time. Polling
faxes at preset times allows you to conduct document transactions later at night
when the telephone rates are lower.
Before you set up polling at a preset time, make sure you have performed the
following tasks:
½
The numbers you want to register for dialling must be registered for One-
touch or Coded Speed Dialling buttons. (Q4-6, 4-14)
½
When you register the One-touch or Coded Speed dialling button, you must
turn on OPTIONAL SETTINGS and set the TX TYPE for POLLING RX
when the other party set subaddress/password, you have to register an ITU-T
subaddress and/or password for the speed dialling button. (Q4-8, 4-16)
½
If you have to poll a number that you use regularly, you should register it
once again for another speed dialling button so you can set the ITU-T
subaddress and/or password to match the polling box of the other party’s fax
and register the second number for preset polling.
1. Open the PRESET POLLING menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FILE SETTINGS
4.PRESET POLLING
SET
SET
SET
Press SET.
PRESET POLLING
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press SET.
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
3. Enter a two-digit box number (00-99) for the polling box. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
1.FILE NAME
4. Enter a file name.
Press SET.
SET
FILE NAME
:A
This is the name of the file that will hold the polled document you receive.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name up to 24 characters
long. (Q3-8)
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
GHI
JKL
MNO
5
8
0
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
11-6
Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET.
SETUP FILE
2.PASSWORD
5. If you want to set a password go to the next step.
This is the operation password to protect your preset polling settings. To
change the settings later, you will have to enter this password.
-or-
If you do not want to set a password, press the down search button to display
the next item.
SET
SET
6. Press SET to set a password.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Enter a four-digit password and press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
3.SELECT LOCATIONS
SET
Press SET.
TEL=
ABC
DEF
7. Dial the other party’s fax number.
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
GHI
JKL
MNO
Press a One-touch Speed Dialling button to dial the number. (Q4-26)
-or-
5
8
0
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
Press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code to dial the number. (Q4-28)
If you make a mistake during dialling, press STOP to return to standby and
start again.
You can enter up 200 numbers to be polled by your fax.
SET
Press SET.
SETUP FILE
4.START TIME
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can set the fax to poll other faxes everyday or only for selected days. For
any day you can set up to 5 times for the fax to poll another unit during a 24-
hour period.
8. Set the fax to poll other faxes every day or on selected days.
To set preset polling for every day
SETUP FILE
4.START TIME
SET
SET
SET
Press SET.
START TIME
EVERYDAY
Press SET.
EVERYDAY
1:
:
:
Press SET.
EVERYDAY
1:
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time.
Enter the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
½
If you make a mistake, press CLEAR to erase the number and try again.
EVERYDAY
1:
00:30
SET
Press SET.
If you want to set more than one time for your fax unit to poll the other
faxes, press the search buttons to display another empty setting.
EVERYDAY
2:
:
11-8
Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET and use the numeric keypad to enter another time in 24-hour
format.
You can register up to 5 times for your fax to poll other faxes every day.
When you are finished setting times, press STOP to return to standby.
To set preset polling for selected days
SETUP FILE
4.START TIME
SET
Press SET.
START TIME
EVERYDAY
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
START TIME
SELECT DAYS
SET
Press SET.
SELECT DAYS
1.SUN
Press the search buttons to display the name of the first day you want to set
up then press SET.
SET
SET
MON
1:
:
Press SET.
MON
1:
:
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time.
Enter the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
½
If you make a mistake, press CLEAR to erase the number and try again.
MON
1:
02:00
SET
Press SET.
If you want to set more than one time for your fax unit to poll the other faxes
on the selected day, press the search buttons to display another empty setting.
MON
2:
:
SET
Press SET and use the numeric keypad to enter another time in 24- hour
format.
You can register up to 5 times for your fax to poll other faxes on the selected day.
When you are finished setting the time(s) for the selected day, press STOP to
return to standby.
-or-
DATA REGISTRATION
If you want to select another day, press DATA REGISTRATION to return
to the previous level so you can select another day and repeat the procedure
to set the times for that day.
When you are finished selecting days and setting times, press STOP to return
to standby.
11-10 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Preset Polling Settings
Follow this procedure to change the settings of the preset polling setup file.
1. Open the PRESET POLLING menu. (Q11-11)
PRESET POLLING
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
PRESET POLLING
2.CHANGE DATA
SET
3. Press SET.
CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number of the
preset polling box you want to change. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CHANGE DATA
PASSWORD
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next step.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit password and
press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
6. Use the search buttons to display the item you want to change and press SET.
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
SET
CHANGE DATA
4.START TIME
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. To change a setting, follow the same procedures you used to set them.
(Q11-7)
½
To change the password setting, you will first have to enter the current
password and press SET. Then you can enter a new password and press
SET.
8. When you are finished making changes, press STOP to return to standby.
Cancelling Preset Polling
Follow this procedure to cancel preset polling.
1. Open the PRESET POLLING menu. (Q11-5)
PRESET POLLING
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
PRESET POLLING
3.DELETE FILE
SET
3. Press SET.
DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the preset two-digit code of
the polling box. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next step.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit password
protecting the preset polling setup file. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
After you enter the password, the file is deleted.
DELETE FILE
FILE DELETED
DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
00
11-12 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Press STOP to return to standby.
Setting Up Polling Sending
This section shows you how to set up your fax to store and hold a document until
it is polled by another fax to send it.
Before You Can Be Polled to Send
Before you set up your polling box, contact the parties who are going to poll your
fax to receive documents and confirm the following points:
½
½
The other parties must know your ITU-T subaddress number.
If you are also using an ITU-T password for the polling box, they must also
know this password. This password setting is optional.
½
½
Your TX PASSWORD must match the ITU-T password attached when the
other party calls you. Confirm that the TX PASSWORD on your fax matches
the ITU-T password attached when the other party calls you.
If the other party’s fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions, you may be able to use the polling box #00.
Setting Up a Polling Box
Before you can use polling sending, you must create a polling box with the File
settings. The polling box holds the document in the memory until the other party
polls your fax to send the document.
1. Open the FILE SETTINGS menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
2. Open the POLLING BOX menu.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FILE SETTINGS
5.POLLING BOX
SET
Press SET.
POLLING BOX
1.SETUP FILE
3. Create a polling box and give it a number.
Press SET.
SET
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit code for the box.
Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
1.FILE NAME
If the other party’s fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions, set the box number to 00 so the other party can poll your fax unit
and receive the document.
4. Create a file name to store the document in the memory where it will wait to
be polled by other fax unites.
SET
Press SET.
FILE NAME
:A
11-14 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to 24
characters. (Q3-7)
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
FILE NAME
CANON TOKYO
:A
SET
Press SET.
SETUP FILE
2.PASSWORD
5. If you don’t want to set password, press the search buttons to go to the next
step.
-or-
SET
If you want to enter a password to protect the polling box setup file, Press
SET.
PASSWORD
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit password.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PASSWORD
1147
PQRS
WXYZ
SET
Press SET.
SETUP FILE
3.SUBADDRESS
If you set the box number to 00 for a party whose fax unit does not support
ITU-T subaddress/password transactions, you do not have to register
3.SUBADDRESS and 4.TX PASSWORD. Just press the search buttons to
display 5.ERASE AFTER TX then go to step 9.
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
6. Press SET.
SUBADDRESS
This is the ITU-T subaddress. An ITU-T subaddress is a number up to 20
digits long which can include spaces and the symbols and #.
*
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
7. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the subaddress and press
SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SETUP FILE
4.TX PASSWORD
If you do not want to enter the ITU-T password, press the down search
button to display the next item and go on to the next step.
-or-
SET
If you want to enter an ITU-T password press SET.
TX PASSWORD
An ITU-T password is a number up to 20 digits long which can include spaces
and the symbols and #.
*
If you register a TX PASSWORD, it must match the ITU-T password attached
when the other party calls you.
ABC
DEF
8. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the password.
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
GHI
JKL
MNO
TX PASSWORD
#12345676
5
8
0
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SET
Press SET.
SETUP FILE
5.ERASE AFTER TX
11-16 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Set the polling box to erase or keep the document after polling.
Press SET.
SET
Press the search buttons to display the setting you want.
ERASE AFTER TX
ON
ERASE AFTER TX
OFF
ON
The document in the memory box is erased after it is sent once in
response to polling by another fax.
OFF The document in the memory box is not erased after it is polled.
Select this setting if you expect the document will be polled by more
than one fax.
SET
With the selection you want displayed, press SET.
10. You can repeat this procedure to set up another polling box.
-or-
Press STOP to return to standby.
Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling Sending
Follow this procedure to scan a document into the polling box. The document
will remain in the polling box to be polled by other fax units.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
2. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press POLLING.
POLLING
1.POLLING TX
POLLING
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
3. Press SET.
SUBADDRESS
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. If the other party’s fax supports ITU-T subaddresses and passwords, use the
buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the subaddress for the polling box.
Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
-or-
SET
If the other party’s fax does not support ITU-T subaddresses and passwords,
just press SET.
5. If you want to skip selecting a sender name, go on to the next step.
-or-
TTI SELECTOR
If you want to select a sender name, press TTI SELECTOR until you see the
sender name you want to use. You can also use the search buttons to scroll up
and down the TTI list.
SENDER’S NAME
20 CANON FAX DIV.
SET
6. Press SET. The fax starts scanning the document into the polling box.
POLLING TX
6048
SCANNING DOC. P.003
When another party polls your fax to receive a document stored in your
polling box, the document is sent if the following conditions are met:
½
½
½
If you entered both a subaddress and password when you created the
polling box, the subaddress and password of the other party’s polling
request must match the subaddress and password for the polling box.
The password setting is optional. However, if you have registered a
password for the polling box, the other party’s polling request must
contain a matching password.
If no password is registered for the document in the polling box and the
other party’s polling request contains a password, then the document is
not sent.
11-18 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Polling Box Setup
Follow this procedure to change the setup of the polling box.
1. Open the POLLING BOX menu. (Q11-13)
POLLING BOX
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
POLLING BOX
2.CHANGE DATA
SET
3. Press SET.
CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the polling box number.
Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CHANGE DATA
PASSWORD
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next step.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit password
protecting the polling box setup file. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
6. Press the search buttons to display the item you want to change.
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
CHANGE DATA
5.ERASE AFTER TX
SET
7. Press SET.
8. To change the settings, follow the same procedures you used to set up the
polling box setup file. (Q11-13)
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. When you are finished, press STOP to return to standby.
Cancelling a Polling Box
Follow this procedure to cancel a polling box.
You can not cancel a polling box when the polling box is holding a document for
polling sending.
1. Open the POLLING BOX menu. (Q11-13)
POLLING BOX
1.SETUP FILE
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
POLLING BOX
3.DELETE FILE
SET
3. Press SET.
DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
00
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of the box that
you want to delete. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next step.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit operation
password protecting the polling box setup file. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
After you press SET, the polling box is deleted.
DELETE FILE
FILE DELETED
6. Press STOP to return to standby.
11-20 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12
Other Special Features
This chapter describes some convenient features that you may want to use in
daily operations.
Using the Telephone ................................................................................................. 12-2
Tone Dialling on a Pulse Line ................................................................................. 12-3
Setting and Using the Program Button .................................................................. 12-4
Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp Feature ............................................. 12-7
Setting Up the Stamp Feature ..................................................................... 12-7
Turning the Stamp Feature ON/OFF .......................................................... 12-9
How the Fax Operates with Default Settings ...................................................... 12-10
Chapter 12
Other Special Features
12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Telephone
Follow this procedure to use the telephone for voice communication if you have
installed the optional handset kit. (Q2-22)
1. Pick up the handset.
-or-
or
Press the HOOK button.
TEL=
2. When you hear the dial tone, dial the telephone number.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (Q6-7)
1
4
7
2
5
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
-or-
PQRS
WXYZ
Press a One-touch Speed Dialling button to dial the number. (Q4-26)
8
0
-or-
Press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code to dial the number. (Q4-28)
-or-
Dial the number with directory dialling. (Q4-31)
If you make a mistake during dialling, press STOP to return to standby and
start again.
TEL=
123 4567
3. When the other party answers your call, you can talk into the handset.
-or-
If you did not pick up handset in step 1, pick up the handset as soon as you
hear the other party answer. The other party will not be able to hear you
until you pick up the handset.
-or-
If the other party does not answer, or if the line is busy, just hang up the
handset or press HOOK to disconnect.
or
12-2
Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone Dialling on a Pulse Line
Many telephone information services for banks, airline reservations, hotel
reservations, etc., require tone dialling for their services. If your fax is connected
to a rotary pulse line, follow this procedure to set the fax temporarily for tone
dialling.
1. Press HOOK.
The IN USE lamp lights and you will hear the dial tone.
-or-
Just pick up the handset if you have installed the optional handset kit.
(Q2-20)
The level of the dial tone can be adjusted. (Q2-12)
TEL=
2. Dial the telephone number.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the telephone number of the
information service.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
TEL=
123 4567
3. When the recorded message of the information service answers, open both
One-touch Speed Dialling panels, then press TONE/+.
After you press TONE/+ you will see a “T” in the display.
TONE/
+
TEL=
123 4567T
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
4. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the numbers requested by
the information service.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
GHI
MNO
6
PQRS
WXYZ
9
Chapter 12
Other Special Features
12-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting and Using the Program Button
The program button feature allows you to register a setting so you can
automatically perform a routine procedure with a single button press.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
SET
2. Press SET twice.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
USER SETTINGS
1.DATE & TIME
3. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
USER SETTINGS
8.PROGRAM KEY
SET
4. Press SET to display the current settings.
PROGRAM KEY
PRINT REPORT
5. Press the search buttons to display the function you want to assign to the
PROGRAM button.
You can select only one function at a time to assign to the PROGRAM button.
12-4
Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROGRAM button Setup Summary
The default (PRINT REPORT) remains in effect unless you change it.
PRINT REPORT
Sets the PROGRAM button to function as a print
transmission report button. Whenever you need a
transmission report for a document you are sending,
just press the PROGRAM button and a transmission
report will print after the document is sent.
REPORT
Assigns the PROGRAM button the functions of the
REPORT button. Whenever you need to print a
report, all you have to do is press the PROGRAM
button. This saves you the effort of opening both One-
touch Speed Dialling panels to press the REPORT
button.
D.T.
Sets the PROGRAM button to function like the D.T.
button so you do not have to open both One-touch
Speed Dialling panels to press the D.T. button.
TONE
Sets the PROGRAM button to function like TONE
button so you do not have to open both One-touch
Speed Dialling panels to press the TONE button.
SCANNING MODE
Set up the RESOLUTION, CONTRAST, or
DOCUMENT TYPE buttons for sending special
documents and then store the settings under the
PROGRAM button. The next time you need to set
them before a document transmission, you can set them
with a single button press.
STAMP
If you had the optional stamp feature installed for you,
this feature is available. If you select STAMP you can
turn the stamp feature on and off without opening both
One-touch Speed Dialling panels to press the STAMP
button.
Chapter 12
Other Special Features
12-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set transmission report feature
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
PROGRAM KEY
PRINT REPORT
SET
Press SET.
To use this feature, press the PROGRAM button before you dial to have a
report printed for the transaction.
To set up the REPORT button feature
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
PROGRAM KEY
REPORT
SET
Press SET.
PROGRAM
Now any time you need a report, press the PROGRAM button.
Use the search buttons to choose the report you want. Then press SET.
REPORT
SET
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
REPORT
6.RX MEM. BOX LIST
To set up the scanning mode
Press search buttons until you see the display below.
PROGRAM KEY
SCANNING MODE
SET
Press SET.
SELECT SCANNING MODE
Use the RESOLUTION, CONTRAST, or DOCUMENT TYPE buttons to
set these features for scanning (or copying) the document. (Q6-4)
12-6
Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET.
SELECT SCANNING MODE
DATA ENTRY OK
6. Press STOP to return to standby.
Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp
Feature
If the optional stamp feature is provided on your fax machine, you can set the fax
to stamp the front, lower left corner of every page you scan for sending.
Setting Up the Stamp Feature
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels.
2. Open the TX SETTINGS menu.
DATA REGISTRATION
Press DATA REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
3.TX SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
Chapter 12
Other Special Features
12-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TX SETTINGS
8.TX STAMP
This item will not appear on the menu unless your fax machine has been
provided with the stamp option.
SET
SET
4. Press SET.
5. Press the search buttons to display ON or OFF then press SET.
If you turn this feature ON, select one of the options described on the next
page.
6. When you are finished, press STOP to return to standby.
TX Stamp Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you change them.
ON
Turns on the stamp feature. After you set this switch ON,
documents will be stamped according to the following settings.
If you do not want to stamp temporarily, you can use the
STAMP button to turn the stamp feature off.
STAMP ACTION
DIRECT & MEMORY TX Stamps all documents you
scan for direct sending or
memory sending.
DIRECT TX
Stamps only documents you
scan for direct sending.
OFF
Turns off stamping documents scanned for sending. However,
before you scan a document, you can still turn on the stamp
feature for a document you want to stamp with STAMP button.
12-8
Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning the Stamp Feature ON/OFF
If you have turned the TX STAMP setting ON, documents will be stamped
according to the above setting. If you have not turned on the TX STAMP feature
but you still want to occasionally stamp documents you scan for sending, or if you
have turned on the TX STAMP feature but you want to turn it off occasionally,
follow the procedure below.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR button.
(Q6-6)
2. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels and press STAMP.
TX STAMP
OFF
STAMP
OPTION
(
)
3. If you want to stamp document pages, press the search buttons until you see
ON.
TX STAMP
ON
-or-
If you want to turn the stamp feature off, press the search buttons until you
see OFF.
TX STAMP
OFF
SET
4. Press SET.
TEL=
5. Close both One-touch Speed Dialling panels and send the document.
Chapter 12
Other Special Features
12-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the Fax Operates with Default Settings
There are many minor features that you can change to customize the operation
of the fax. Some of these features are listed in the table below. The description in
the third column is the default setting. In other words, this is how the fax will
operate unless you change the referenced setting.
If your fax is not operating as described, this means the default may have already
been changed. In such a case you may want to go to the referenced page to
restore the default setting.
Feature
Menu Item
Description of default
Batch sending
BATCH TX
If several documents for the same destination with the same
telephone number are stored in the memory for delayed
sending, when the timer goes off for one of the documents all
other documents for the same destination are sent together in
the same transmission, regardless of their time setting. (Q16-10)
Button press sound
VOLUME CONTROL
KEYPAD VOLUME
Every time you press a button on the numeric keypad you will
hear a beep. The volume of this beep can be adjusted or it can
be turned off. (Q16-6)
Date format
DATE SETUP
TIME OUT
In the standby mode, the date is listed in the format
DD/MM ’YY. Two other formats are available. (Q16-25)
Dialling timeout
The fax automatically pauses five seconds after you press a
speed dialling button to allow you to dial other numbers for
sequential broadcasting. You can turn the timeout feature off.
(Q16-11)
Document smaller
than paper
SELECT CASSETTE
CASSETTE SW B
If you receive a letter-size document and only a larger paper size
is available, the fax prints the document on the larger paper. If
you do not want the smaller documents printed on larger paper,
you can receive them in the memory. This switch is effective
only when the letter size paper runs out. (Q16-15)
Document too large
for paper
SELECT CASSETTE
CASSETTE SW A
If you receive a legal-size document and only letter-size paper is
available, the document will be divided over two pages or
reduced. If you do not want to divide documents, you can
receive them in the memory. This switch is effective only when
the side cassette is set to legal size and out of legal size paper.
(Q16-15)
ECM sending/receiving ECM TX
ECM RX
The fax is set to conduct all transactions using ECM (error
correction mode). If transmission speed appears to be extremely
slow, you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning
ECM off. (Q16-9, 16-13)
Energy Saver
Language
ENERGY SAVER
The Energy Saver feature is off and will remain off until you
turn it on. (Q3-19, 16-26)
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
The initial display language is English. Other languages are
available. (Q16-26)
12-10 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Menu Item
Description of default
Manual receiving with REMOTE RX
extension phone
To start receiving a fax manually by answering an extension
telephone connected to the fax, dial 25. You can change this
number or set the fax to start receiving after hanging up the
handset of the extension phone. (Q7-6, 16-12)
Memory receiving
MEMORY RX
If paper or toner runs out while you are receiving a long
document the remainder of the document will be stored in the
memory until you can re-fill the paper cassette or replace the
toner cartridge. You can also set an alarm to sound when the fax
starts receiving a document in the memory. (Q16-13)
Offhook alarm
Pause length
OFFHOOK ALARM
MID PAUSE SET
If the handset remains off the hook, an alarm will sound. The
volume of this alarm can be adjusted or it can be turned off.
(Q16-9)
A pause entered within a number is set for 2 seconds. You can
lengthen this pause up to 15 seconds. A pause entered at the
end of a number is fixed at 10 seconds and can not be adjusted.
(Q4-2, 16-9)
Printing: Continue
printing with toner
supply low
TONER SUPPLY LOW
When the toner supply runs low, the fax saves the remainder of
the document into the memory. You can set the fax to continue
printing even after the toner runs low during printing. (Q16-16)
Printing: Footer on
printed documents
RX PAGE FOOTER
PRINT IN ORDER
The fax will not print a footer on every document received
unless you turn this feature on. (Q16-13)
Printing: Print order
The fax prints all document pages in reverse order when you
remove them from the output tray. You can set the fax to print
all document pages in the order they were sent. (Q16-16)
PROGRAM button
PROGRAM KEY
If you press PROGRAM before you start a transmission, you
can tell the fax to print an activity report for the transmission.
This button can be programmed for other functions. (Q12-4,
16-5)
Quick-on-line TX
Receiving password
Redialling
QUICK ON-LINE TX
RX PASSWORD
AUTO REDIAL
When you are scanning documents, the fax will start dialling and
sending before all pages are scanned. You can turn this feature
off. (Q16-10)
No receiving password is set until you set one. If the other party
regularly sends you documents with only an ITU-T password
with no subaddress, set the RX PASSWORD. (Q16-26)
If the other party’s line is busy, the fax is set to perform two re-
dialling attempts at two minute intervals. You can increase the
number of re-dial attempts and the length of the interval
between attempts. If an error occurs during re-dialling, the fax is
set to re-send the first page of the document and the error page.
(Q6-16, 16-10)
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Menu Item
Description of default
Reduction of
document image
RX REDUCTION
All documents are automatically reduced to fit on a sheet of
paper. You can also set the reduction rate to a fixed rate. You
can select one of the fixed rates to increase the amount of
reduction, or you can turn reduction off. (Q16-15)
Report: Activity
Management Report
ACTIVITY REPORT
CONFID. RX REPORT
An Activity Management Report prints after every 40
transactions. Transactions are listed in chronological order. You
can turn this feature off or set the fax to print an Activity
Management Report at the same time every day. You can also
change the format of the report by listing sending and receiving
transactions separately. (Q16-8)
Report: Confidential
receiving
A report is printed every time you receive a document in a
confidential mailbox. You can turn this feature off. (Q16-8)
Report: Error
TX REPORT
REPORT WITH TX
IMAGE
If an error occurs while you are sending a document, an Error
TX report is printed automatically. (Q16-7)
Report: Memory box
receiving
MEMORY BOX
REPORT
A report is printed every time you receive a document in a
memory box. This feature can be turned off. (Q16-8)
Report: Paper supply
for printed reports
PRINT REPORT
WHERE
The default setting if off (no paper cassette selected). You can
select the front or lower cassette (if you install the optional
cassette), or the side cassette, for the print report paper supply.
(Q16-8)
Report: Receiving
RX REPORT
A report is not printed when you receive a fax. However, you
can set the fax to print a report every time you receive a
document or if an error occurs during reception. (Q16-7)
Restricting use: DACs, RESTRICTIVE CODES
user access codes
No password or access codes are set on the fax to restrict
sending documents, printing, or using the handset to make a
telephone call. All these functions can be restricted.
(Q13-5, 16-24)
Restricting use:
Stopping junk mail
RX RESTRICTION
The fax is set to receive all incoming documents. You can
restrict receiving to only numbers registered on your fax for
speed dialling. (Q13-14, 16-25)
Speed
Stamp
TX START SPEED
RX START SPEED
The starting speed for all transactions is set for 14400 bps.
Slower settings are available. (Q16-26)
TX STAMP
If you have the optional stamp feature on your fax machine, you
can turn the stamp feature on with this switch. The default
setting is off. (Q12-7, 16-11)
Tel/Fax switching
Telephone line
MAN/AUTO SWITCH
TEL LINE TYPE
You can set a time interval for the fax to wait until it
automatically enters the document receive mode when the fax is
set for manual receiving. (Q16-12)
Your fax is set to operate on a rotary pulse telephone line.
(Q3-10, 16-6)
12-12 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Menu Item
Description of default
Transmission error:
document in memory
ERASE FAILED TX
If a transmission error occurs, the document remains in the
memory. You can set the fax to erase the document from the
memory if an error occurs during transmission. (Q16-10)
Unit Name, Unit
Telephone Number
DATE & TIME
UNIT TELEPHONE #
UNIT NAME
Your registered identification and fax number are printed at the
top and outside of the image border of every document you
send. Your number is prefixed with the word “FAX”.
(Q3-11, 16-4)
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-14 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax
In this chapter we will show you how to protect the fax from unauthorized access.
Some of these features also allow you to keep track of fax transactions based on
division numbers or user access codes that you can assign to individuals or
sections inside your company.
Setting and Using the System Settings Password ................................................. 13-2
Setting the System Settings Password ......................................................... 13-2
Changing or Cancelling the System Settings Password ............................ 13-3
Restricting Fax Operation ........................................................................................ 13-5
Setting Operation Restrictions .................................................................... 13-5
Operating the Fax with Restrictions ON .................................................... 13-9
Turning Restrictions OFF and ON ............................................................ 13-12
Receiving Documents from Registered Senders Only ...................................... 13-14
Using Memory Lock ............................................................................................... 13-15
Setting a Time and Password for Memory Lock ..................................... 13-15
Turning Memory Lock ON ........................................................................ 13-18
Turning Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents ........................... 13-18
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax
13-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting and Using the System Settings
Password
The system settings password protects all the settings in the System Settings
menu.
If you fail to create and safeguard a system password, then anyone can open the
System Settings menu and change or disable the settings.
Setting the System Settings Password
Follow this procedure to set the system settings password.
1. Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
2. Set the system password.
SET
Press SET.
PASSWORD
13-2
Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit password
between 0000 and 9999.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
PASSWORD
3377
3. Record the password number and store it in a safe location.
You must enter this system password every time you open the System Settings
menu.
SET
Press SET.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.RESTRICTIVE CODES
4. Press STOP to return to standby.
Changing or Cancelling the System Settings Password
Follow this procedure to cancel or change the System Settings password.
1. Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS with your password.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax
13-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
PASSWORD
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Enter the current four-digit system settings password. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
SET
2. Press SET.
PASSWORD
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
3. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the current password. Then
press SET. The current password is not displayed as it is entered.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
PASSWORD
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
4. Enter the new password and press SET. The new password is displayed as it is
entered.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
-or-
To cancel the password setting, press CLEAR then SET.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.RESTRICTIVE CODES
5. Press STOP to return to standby.
13-4
Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restricting Fax Operation
This section describes how to set up restrictions on operation of the fax. We will
first show you how to set up restrictions on sending documents, printing fax
reports and copying, and using the telephone. Then we will show you how to use
the fax with these restrictions on. Finally, we will show you how to turn these
restrictions off temporarily or make changes in the settings.
The table below is a brief summary of how restrictive codes and passwords are
used.
SENDING
RESTRICTION code (DAC) ON
Dept. access
Dept. access code
With a password Every time you send a document, you
must enter a department code and
password.
Without a
password
Every time you send a document, you
only have to enter a department code.
Dept. access
code (DAC)
OFF
With user access code
Every time you send a document, you
only have to enter a user access code.
No user access code
You can not send a document unless
you turn sending restriction OFF.
PRINTING
RESTRICTION
With user access code
Every time you make a copy or print a
report, you must enter a user access
code.
Without user access code
ON
You can not print unless you turn
printing restriction OFF.
TELEPHONE
RESTRICTION
You can not dial unless you turn
telephone restriction OFF.
Setting Operation Restrictions
You can create up to 99 department access codes (DACs) and passwords to
restrict sending operations on the fax. Follow this procedure to restrict access to
all of these features:
½
½
½
Sending documents
Copying documents and printing fax reports
Using the telephone for voice communication
1. Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu with your system settings password.
(Q13-3)
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax
13-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.RESTRICTIVE CODES
3. Turn on the transmission restriction feature.
Press SET.
SET
SET
RESTRICTIVE CODES
1.TX SETTINGS
Press SET.
TX SETTINGS
OFF
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TX SETTINGS
ON
SET
Press SET.
DAC SETUP
OFF
4. Enter the department access codes.
Press the search buttons to display ON then press SET.
DAC SETUP
ON
SET
ENTER DAC
01:
-or-
If the first number is already in use, press the search buttons until you see an
empty line.
13-6
Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-or-
If you do not want to set a department access code (DAC) and want to use
only the user access code for transactions, use the search keys to display OFF,
then press SET and go on to step 6 to set the user access code. If you set only
the user access code, you have to enter only the user access code when you
send a document.
SET
Press SET.
5. Enter the department access code (DAC). Example 01.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit code for the
department access code.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
SET
Press SET.
DAC PASSWORD
6. Enter the department access code password or the user access code.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit code for the
department access code password or the user access code.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
PQRS
WXYZ
DAC PASSWORD
6666
or
USER ACCESS CODE
1234
SET
Press SET.
ENTER DAC
02:
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax
13-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-or-
If you do not want to enter a password and you want to use only the
department access code for transactions, just press SET and go on to the next
step. If you set only the department access code, you have to enter only the
department access code when you send a document.
You can now repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter other department access codes and
passwords.
ENTER DAC
10:
DATA REGISTRATION
7. When you are finished, press DATA REGISTRATION to return to the
previous level of the menu.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
2.PRINTER SETTINGS
8. Turn on the restrictions for printing.
Press SET.
SET
PRINTER SETTINGS
OFF
Press the search buttons to display ON.
PRINTER SETTINGS
ON
SET
Press SET.
USER ACCESS CODE
9. Enter a user access code to protect the copying and printing features.
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit user access code.
This user access code is used only to restrict access to copying and printing.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
USER ACCESS CODE
2894
13-8
Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
3.TEL SETTING
10. Turn off access to the telephone.
Press SET.
SET
TEL SETTING
OFF
Press the search buttons to display ON.
TEL SETTING
ON
SET
Press SET. This disables the telephone handset and the HOOK button on the
operation panel.
This concludes the restrictive settings for sending, printing, and using the
telephone.
11. Press STOP to return to standby.
Operating the Fax with Restrictions ON
This section describes how to operate the fax with the operation restriction
features set up and turned on.
Sending a Document with Restrictions ON
Follow this procedure to send a document after department access codes (DAC)
and passwords have been set up.
1. Set the document on the fax. (Q6-3)
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (Q6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI SELECTOR. (Q6-6)
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax
13-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Dial the other party’s fax number.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use regular dialling to dial a number. (Q6-7)
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
-or-
PQRS
Press a One-touch Speed Dialling button to dial the number. (Q4-26)
-or-
Press CODED DIAL and a three-digit code to dial the number. (Q4-28)
-or-
Dial the number with directory dialling. (Q4-31)
3. Press START/SCAN.
If you see this message, you have to enter the department access code. Go on
to step 4.
ENTER DAC
-or-
If you see this message, you have to enter the user access code. Go on to
step 5.
USER ACCESS CODE
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
SET
4. Enter the DAC (department access code).
1
2
3
GHI
MNO
4
5
8
0
6
9
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit DAC
(department access code) then press SET.
PQRS
WXYZ
7
DAC PASSWORD
If you enter the wrong department access code, the fax beeps and waits for
you to enter the correct code.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
5. Enter the DAC password or user access code.
1
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
4
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit DAC password
or user access code then press SET.
PQRS
7
If you enter the wrong password, the fax beeps and waits for you to enter the
correct password.
13-10 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you enter the department access code and password correctly or user
access code, the fax sends the document.
Making a Copy with Restrictions ON
Follow this procedure to make a copy with the printing restriction set up and
turned on.
1. Set the document on the fax.
DOCUMENT READY
2. Press COPY.
USER ACCESS CODE
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
3. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit user access
code that you set previously to restrict access to copying. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
COPY
01
FRONT UPPER CAS. A4
4. Follow the normal procedure to complete copying the document. (Q5-5)
Printing a Report with Restrictions ON
Follow this procedure to print a report about information stored in the fax with
the printing restriction set up and turned on.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press REPORT.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
REPORT
2. Press the search buttons to select the type of report you want to print then
press SET.
SET
USER ACCESS CODE
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
3. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit user access
code you set to protect printing reports. Then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
The fax starts printing the report.
PRINTING REPORT
Using the Telephone with Restrictions ON
When the telephone restriction feature is turned on, the handset and HOOK
button are disabled. If you pick up the handset or press the HOOK button, you
will not hear a dial tone.
Turning Restrictions OFF and ON
Follow this procedure to turn off the following features temporarily without
changing the settings.
1. Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu with your system settings password.
(Q13-3)
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.RESTRICTIVE CODES
SET
3. Press SET.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
1.TX SETTINGS
4. Press the search buttons to display the feature you want to turn off.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
1.TX SETTINGS
RESTRICTIVE CODES
3.TELEPHONE SETTINGS
13-12 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Turn Off Restricted Sending
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
1.TX SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
TX SETTINGS
ON
Press a search button to display OFF, then press SET.
SET
To Turn Off Restricted Printing
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
2.PRINTER SETTINGS
SET
Press SET.
PRINTER SETTINGS
ON
Press a search button to display OFF, then press SET.
SET
To turn off restricted use of the telephone
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
3.TEL SETTING
SET
Press SET.
TEL SETTING
ON
Press a search button to display OFF, then press SET.
SET
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press STOP to return to standby.
To turn the settings on again, just repeat this procedure from step 1 and select
ON.
Receiving Documents from Registered
Senders Only
Follow this procedure to turn restricted receiving on and off. Restricted receiving
limits document reception to fax units whose telephone numbers are registered
on your fax for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling buttons. You can not receive
a document from another fax unless it is registered on your fax for a speed
dialling button, so the fax will not receive unsolicited direct mail.
1. Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu with your system settings password.
(Q13-3)
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
4.RX RESTRICTION
SET
3. Press SET.
4. Press the search buttons to display the setting you want, then press SET.
RX RESTRICTION
SET
OFF
RX RESTRICTION
ON
OFF
ON
Your fax will receive a document even if the fax telephone
number of the originator is not registered on your fax for a One-
touch Speed Dialling button or a Coded Speed Dialling code.
However, other restrictions like passwords, subaddresses, and so
on, still apply.
Your fax will receive a document only if the fax telephone
number of the originator is registered on your fax for a One-
touch Speed Dialling button or a Coded Speed Dialling code.
5. Press STOP to return to standby.
13-14 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Memory Lock
Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be
occasions when you want the fax to store all documents in the memory until you
are ready to print them. Locking the fax to receive and store all documents in the
memory is called memory lock.
You may want to turn memory lock on when the fax is left unattended at night or
over long holidays to prevent a large volume of printed documents from
collecting on the paper output tray. After you return to the office, you can review
the contents of the memory and then enter the memory lock password to print all
the documents stored in the memory.
Setting a Time and Password for Memory Lock
After memory lock is turned on, the fax will automatically enter and leave the
memory lock mode at times you specify. The documents received when the fax is
in the memory lock mode are stored in the memory until you unlock the memory
with a password and print them.
Follow the procedure below to define a memory lock password and set the times
for the fax to enter and leave the memory lock mode.
1. Open the MEMORY LOCK menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
DATA REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
SET
Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
Press SET. Be sure to enter your system settings password if you have one.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
3.MEMORY LOCK RX
SET
Press SET.
MEMORY LOCK RX
OFF
2. Turn on the memory lock feature.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MEMORY LOCK RX
ON
SET
SET
Press SET.
3. Press the search buttons to display the setting you want and press SET.
MEMORY LOCK RX
1.MEM LOCK PASSWORD
MEMORY LOCK RX
3.TIME SETUP
4. For details about setting up the memory lock feature, refer to the summary
below.
13-16 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Lock Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you change them.
1.MEM LOCK PASSWORD
0000 to 9999
This password protects the memory lock settings. You must also
use this password to unlock the memory so you can print
documents stored in the memory. Use the buttons on the numeric
keypad to enter a four-digit password and press SET.
2.REPORT
Set the fax to print reports or not. This setting affects only reports
that print automatically, such as Activity Reports for sending and
receiving, and Activity Management Reports.
OUTPUT NO
A report is not printed while in the
memory lock mode.
OUTPUT YES
A report is printed while the fax is in
the memory lock mode.
3.TIME SETUP
Set the times for the fax to enter and leave the memory lock
mode. The time settings are optional. If you do not set the times,
you can use the MEMORY RECEPTION button to turn the
memory lock feature on and off.
OFF
Turns off the timer setup. You can
turn the memory lock mode on and
off with the MEMORY
RECEPTION button.
ON
Turns on the timer setup. You can
still use the MEMORY
RECEPTION button to turn the
memory lock mode on and off.
START TIME
Sets the time for the fax to enter the
memory lock mode.
EVERYDAY
SELECT DAYS
Set the time in 24-hour format. Up to
5 starting times can be specified for
every day or each selected day.
END TIME
Sets the time for the fax to leave the
memory lock mode.
EVERYDAY
SELECT DAYS
Set the time in 24-hour format. Up to
5 starting times can be specified for
every day or each selected day.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning Memory Lock ON
Follow this procedure to put the fax in the memory lock mode if the memory lock
mode timer has not been set or if you want to put the fax in the memory lock
mode before the timer turns memory lock on.
If the timer is set for the memory lock feature, the fax will enter and leave the
memory lock mode automatically.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press MEMORY
RECEPTION.
MEM LOCK PASSWORD
MEMORY RECEPTION
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
Enter the memory lock password then press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
MEMORY LOCK RX
The fax is now in the memory lock receive mode. All documents will be
received in the memory until you unlock memory receiving and print them.
Turning Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents
Follow this procedure to turn memory lock off and print the documents received
in the memory.
If the timer is set for the memory lock feature, the fax will enter and leave the
memory lock mode automatically. (Q13-15)
1. When memory lock is on, a message is displayed.
MEMORY LOCK RX
2. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press MEMORY
RECEPTION.
MEM LOCK PASSWORD
MEMORY RECEPTION
13-18 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
JKL
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
SET
3. Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit memory lock
password and press SET.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
All the documents received in the memory while the fax was in the memory
lock mode are printed.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-20 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists
This chapter shows you how to print lists and reports.
You can print lists of telephone numbers and transmissions settings registered in
the fax, as well as print reports about document transactions.
Printing the Speed Dialling Lists ............................................................................ 14-2
Printing the User Data List ..................................................................................... 14-5
Printing the List of Sender Names ......................................................................... 14-6
Activity Reports ........................................................................................................ 14-7
Printing the Activity Management Report ................................................ 14-7
Setting and Using Activity Reports ............................................................ 14-9
Memory Lists ........................................................................................................... 14-15
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists
14-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing the Speed Dialling Lists
Follow this procedure to print the speed dialling lists. You can print two types of
One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling list: a standard list (List 1) or a detailed list
(List 2).
1. Open the SPEED DIAL LIST menu.
Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press REPORT.
REPORT
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REPORT
2.SPEED DIAL LIST
SET
Press SET.
SPEED DIAL LIST
1.1-TOUCH LIST
2. Press the search buttons to display the name of the list you want to print.
1.1-TOUCH LIST
Prints the standard list (List 1) of all One-touch
Speed Dialling buttons and numbers registered in
the fax.
2.CODED DIAL LIST
Prints the standard list (List 1) of all Coded Speed
Dialling buttons and numbers registered in the
fax.
3.1-TOUCH (DETAIL) Prints the detailed list (List 2) of all One-touch
Speed Dialling buttons and numbers registered in
the fax in a stacked format.
4.CODED (DETAIL)
Prints the detailed list (List 2) of all Coded Speed
Dialling buttons and numbers registered in the fax
in a stacked format.
5.GROUP DIAL LIST
Prints the list of buttons and numbers registered
for Group Dialling.
14-2
Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
3. Press SET.
The Group Dial list starts printing.
SORTED OUTPUT
1.NO
1.NO
The One-touch or Coded Speed Dial list is printed in order of the
Speed Dial numeric list, from the lowest number to the highest
number.
2.YES The Connection ID (name) column is sorted and the One-touch or
Coded Speed Dial list is printed in alphabetical order.
4. Press the search buttons to display YES or NO. Press SET.
After you press SET, the report starts printing.
SET
PRINTING REPORT
Samples of each type of list are shown below.
One-Touch Speed Dial List 1
26/12 ’97 14:22 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST 1
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
NO.
[ 01]
[ 02]
[ 03]
[ 04]
CONNECTION TEL
732 2233
761 1298
1 914 438 3619
1 516 911 4411
CONNECTION ID
ADAM BOOKS, CPA
JOHN BARRISTER, ESQ.
SEYMOUR GREEN, INC.
NATALIE SMITH, CPM
TX TYPE
MEMORY TX
MEMORY TX
MEMORY TX
MEMORY TX
23:30
23:30
Coded Speed Dial List 1
26/12 ’97 15:42 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
CODED SPEED DIAL LIST 1
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
NO.
[#000]
[#001]
[#002]
[#003]
CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID
TX TYPE
MEMORY TX
MEMORY TX
MEMORY TX
MEMORY TX
555 1234
BILL
14043333499
16172223322
1 312 538 4005
PEACHTREE, INC.
HUNT INVESTMENTS
LAKESIDE INC.
23:30
23:30
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists
14-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One-Touch Speed Dialling List 2
26/12 ’97 16:00 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST 2
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
[
[
01]
02]
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
889 344 222
AK ENTERPRISES
(1) 10:00 (2) 12:00 (3) 14:00 (4) 16:00 (5) 18:00
14400bps(1)
REGULAR TX
ON
TX TYPE
ECM
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
513 931 7660
ENVIRONS CORP.
(1) 23:30 (2) 08:00 (3)
14400bps(1)
REGULAR TX
(4)
(5)
TX TYPE
ON
– – – – – – – – –E–CM– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Coded Speed Dial List 2
26/12 ’97 16:00 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
CODED SPEED DIAL LIST 2
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
[*024]
[*075]
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
982 8877
AK ASSOCIATES
(1) 10:00 (2) 12:00 (3) 14:00 (4) 16:00 (5) 18:00
14400bps(1)
REGULAR TX
ON
TX TYPE
BCM
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
712 0965
T&S DESIGNS
(1) 23:30 (2) 08:00 (3)
14400bps(1)
REGULAR TX
ON
(4)
(5)
TX TYPE
– – – – – – – – –B–CM– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Group Dial List
26/12 ’97 16:00 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
GROUP DIAL LIST
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
[
05] CANON GROUP
[*001] 225 7823
[*010] 233 7766
[ 01] 876 2398
[ 02] 613 9076
CANON NY
CANON CA
CANON TX
CANON OH
14-4
Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing the User Data List
Follow this procedure to print a comprehensive list of the current user data and
other settings.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press REPORT.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
REPORT
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REPORT
3.USER DATA LIST
SET
SET
3. Press SET.
USER DATA LIST
1.USER DATA
4. Press SET to start printing.
After you press SET, the report starts printing.
PRINTING REPORT
User’s Data List
26/12 ’97 17:00 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
USER’S DATA LIST
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
1.USER SETTINGS
UNIT TELEPHONE #
UNIT NAME
TX TERMINAL ID
TTI POSITION
ON
OUTSIDE IMAGE
FAX
TELEPHONE # MARK
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
MULTIPLE PG BATCH TX
4.RX SETTINGS
ECM RX
ON
MAN/AUTO SWITCH
REMOTE RX
OFF
ID CALL#
REMOTE RX ID
MEMORY RX
MEMORY RX ALARM
RX PAGE FOOTER
25
ON
OFF
OFF
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists
14-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing the List of Sender Names
Follow this procedure to print a list of sender names registered in the fax.
½
½
The sender names are names registered to print at the top of documents you
send in place of the unit name. (Q3-12)
Sender names are selected by pressing TTI SELECTOR just before you send
a document. (Q6-6)
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press REPORT.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
REPORT
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REPORT
3.USER DATA LIST
SET
3. Press SET.
USER DATA LIST
1.USER DATA
4. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
USER DATA LIST
2.SENDER’S NAME
SET
5. Press SET.
After you press SET, the report starts printing.
PRINTING REPORT
Sender Name List
26/12 ’97 15:02 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
SENDER NAME LIST
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
01:R.LOUIS
04:B.THOMAS
02:S.ROBERTS
05:F.DILLON
03:R.SEAL
06:B.DWYER
14-6
Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Activity Reports
Activity reports contain information about past fax transactions. The Activity
Management Report prints a list of the past 40 transactions, and other activity
reports report information about transactions as they occur.
Here is a summary of some of the abbreviations used in activity reports.
ST. TIME
Represents the time the last attempt was made to transmit a
document.
USAGE T
Represents the amount of time it took during the last attempt to
transmit. Note that the usage time does not reflect the total usage
time used to transmit all pages of the document when a retry
occurs. By printing an ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT
and matching the transaction number of the TX REPORT with a
transaction number of in the ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT
REPORT you can know exactly how many attempts were made to
send the document, how many pages were sent in each attempt as
well as the usage time for each attempt.
PGS. SENT Represents the total number of pages that were successfully
transmitted.
RESULT
OK means all pages were transmitted either during the first
attempt or after the first or second retry.
The default, which is two retries, can be changed. (Q6-16, 16-10)
NG means that either some or no pages were transmitted after
two retries. The default, which is two retries, can be changed.
(Q6-16, 16-10)
Printing the Activity Management Report
Follow this procedure to print a list of the previous 40 transactions on your fax.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press REPORT.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
REPORT
SET
2. Press SET.
After you press SET, the fax prints an Activity Management Report in the
standard format with all transactions listed chronologically.
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists
14-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Activity Management Report
26/12 ’97 13:14 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
ACTIVITY REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
ST. TIME
26/12 09:49
26/12 10:45
26/12 15:38
CONNECTION TEL/ID
761 1298 JOHN BARRISTER, ESQ.
1 81 3 758 2111 CANON INC.
SENDER NAME
NO.
MODE
PGS.
RESULT
0085 TRANSMIT TX
0086 TRANSMIT TX
0087 TRANSMIT TX
1 OK 00’17
2 OK 00’58
0 NG 00’29
0 #224
R.LOUIS
1 213 554 3377
R.LOUIS
1 213 554 3377
CALIFORNIA CENTER
26/12 16:32
CALIFORNIA CENTER
0088 RECEIVE
RX
2 OK 00’32
You can set the fax to print sending and receiving transactions separately by
setting the ACTIVITY REPORT item in the Report Settings menu. (Q16-8)
Samples are shown below.
Activity Management Report (TX/RX separate)
26/12 ’97 13:14 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT TX
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
ST. TIME
26/12 09:49
26/12 10:45
26/12 15:38
CONNECTION TEL/ID
761 1298 JOHN BARRISTER, ESQ.
1 81 3 758 2111 CANON INC.
R.LOUIS CALIFORNIA CENTER
1 213 554 3377
SENDER NAME
NO.
MODE
PGS.
RESULT
0085 TRANSMIT ECM
0086 TRANSMIT ECM
0087 TRANSMIT ECM
1 OK 00’17
2 OK 00’58
0 NG 00’29
0 #224
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT RX
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
*
ST. TIME
CONNECTION TEL/ID
RX NAME
NO.
MODE
PGS.
RESULT
*26/12 12:45 JOHN BARRISTER
444 5380
5022 AUTO RX
ECM
12 NG 04’16
4
STOP
*26/12 12:50 COURTHOUSE
0074 POLLING RX ECM
*5023
3 NG 01’16
#018
222 1111
0
If marked with an asterisk, the document has already been printed out.
Transaction number
Sending mode
Transaction via Error Correction Mode (ECM)
Number of pages with an error
Error codes (see table in Chapter 15)
STOP was pressed during transaction
14-8
Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note the following additional features you can set up with the ACTIVITY
REPORT item in the Report Settings menu.
½
½
½
The fax is set to print an Activity Management Report automatically after 40
transactions. You can turn this feature off. (Q16-8)
You can set the fax to print an Activity Management Report at the same time
every day. (Q16-8)
If you set up department access codes, when this feature is turned on
transactions are listed by department in the Department Access Code Report
shown below.
Department Access Code Report
26/12 ’97 16:43 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
ACTIVITY REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DEPT. ACCESS CODE: 1222
CONNECTION TEL/ID
ST. TIME
SENDER NAME
03:S.ROBERTS
NO.
MODE
PGS.
RESULT
26/12 15:18
ADAM BOOKS, CPA
732 2233
0080 TRANSMIT ECM
1 OK 00’31
DEPT. ACCESS CODE: 3111
CONNECTION TEL/ID
ST. TIME
SENDER NAME
01:R.LOUIS
NO.
MODE
PGS.
RESULT
26/12 15:30
COURTHOUSE
788 1265
0081 TRANSMIT ECM
2 OK 00’58
Setting and Using Activity Reports
For details about setting up these activity reports to print (or turning them off)
refer to the Report Settings summary at the end of this User’s Guide. (Q16-7)
Error Report (TX)
The fax is set to print a report if an error occurs during sending. This is the
default setting for the Report Settings. (Q16-7)
26/12 ’97 13:23 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
ERROR TX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED
TX/RX NO
0017
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
1 213 978 3314
#006
BELZER, INC.
26/12 13:35
USAGE T
00’00”
PGS. SENT
RESULT
0
NG
STOP
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists
14-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission (TX) Report
You can change the Report Settings to print a transmission report for every
document you send. (Q16-7)
26/12 ’97 14:26 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
TX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
TRANSMISSION OK
TX/RX NO
0015
DEPT. ACCESS CODE
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
1322
1 213 978 3314
#4622
BELZER, INC.
26/12 13:23
USAGE T
PGS. SENT
00’17
1
RESULT
OK
14-10 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission (TX) Report with first page
You can adjust the transmission report setting to print the first part of the
document as part of the report to remind you of the content of the document.
(Q16-7) This is only effective when you send documents by Memory Sending.
26/12 ’97 14:26 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
TX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
TRANSMISSION OK
TX/RX NO
0015
DEPT. ACCESS CODE
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
2222
1 213 978 3314
#2399
BELZER, INC.
26/12 13:23
USAGE T
PGS. SENT
00’17
1
RESULT
OK
December 28, 1995
Dear Member,
By now you have all had a chance to become familiar with your new
Canon fax units and are ready to set up a reliable, economical
communications network that offers many exciting features.
We can save money by scanning documents in the memory and then
setting the delayed timer to send all the documents at the same
time later at night to take advantage of late night rates.
Many of us are separated by long distances and reside in
different time zones. We can set up the polling feature to poll
and receive documents from each other when we are not in the
office. For sensitive material about clients and confidential
bids, we can set up and use the confidential mailbox features. We
will also be able to keep down costs by limiting use of the fax
to operators who know the correct department codes and passwords.
Relay sending is another money saver. We can designate one relay
fax in your area, send one transmission from the home office on
the East coast and then have the document relayed to you loc. ally
We hope you will have these features set up in the very near
future so we can enjory more efficient, secure, and ecomical
facsimile communications.
This item appears only if the DAC (Department Access Code) has been set.
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-transaction Report
If the transmission was a sequential broadcast, then a Multi-transaction Report is
printed.
26/12 ’97 16:00 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
MULTI TX/RX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
TX/RX NO
0094
PGS.
1
TX/RX INCOMPLETE
TRANSACTION OK
------
[ 01] 732 2233
[ 02] 444 5380
[ 03] 477 3299
------
ADAM BOOKS, CPA
JOHN BARRISTER, ESQ
SEYMOUR GREEN
ERROR INFORMATION
Error Report (RX)
You can set the fax to print a report every time an error occurs during document
receiving. Otherwise, only an error message is displayed. (Q16-7)
26/12 ’97 13:23 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
RX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
INCOMPLETE RECEPTION
TX/RX NO
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
USAGE T
5025
1 213 978 3314
#005
BELZER, INC.
26/12 13:35
00’00”
PGS.
0
RESULT
NG
#037
14-12 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reception (RX) Report
You can set the fax to print an activity report every time you receive a document.
(Q16-8)
26/12 ’97 14:26 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
RX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
RECEPTION OK
TX/RX NO
5015
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
444 5380
#2641
SEYMOUR GREEN, INC.
26/12 13:23
USAGE T
PGS.
00’17
1
RESULT
OK
Confidential Receive Report
When the fax receives a confidential document, it displays a message and prints a
report.
RECEIVED IN MAILBOX
26/12 ’97 14:26 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
CONFID. RX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
CONFID. MBOX# #01
CONFID. MBOX NAME
TX/RX NO
LOUIS
5028
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
444 5380
1234
JOHN BARRISTER
26/12 13:13
USAGE T
PGS.
00’56
1
RESULT
OK
Printing this report can be turned off with the User Data Settings. (Q16-8)
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Report
The fax prints a Memory Box Report as soon as a document is received in a
memory box.
26/12 ’97 16:00 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
MEMORY BOX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
BOX#
#66
FILE NAME
TX/RX NO
R.LOUIS
5028
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
444 538
#061348
CANON INC.
26/12 11:00
00’55
USAGE T
PGS.
1
RESULT
OK
This feature can be turned off with the User Data Settings. (Q16-8)
Relay Broadcast Report
The Relay Broadcast Report is sent from a relay unit to the originator after the
documents from the originator have been relayed by the relay unit. This feature
is set with the TX REPORT item in the RELAY TX GROUP menu. (Q9-8,
16-18)
26/12 ’97 16:00 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* RELAY BROADCAST REPORT *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
TX/RX NO
5033
PGS.
2
TX/RX INCOMPLETE
TRANSACTION OK
------
[ 01] 821 7434
[ 02] 931 7660
[ 03] 291 4564
------
ADAM BOOKS, CPA
JOHN BARRISTER, ESQ
SEYMOUR GREEN
ERROR INFORMATION
14-14 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Lists
These reports list information about what is contained in the memory at the
current time.
Confidential Mailbox List
Follow this procedure to print a list of all confidential mailboxes registered in the
fax. This list also shows you which confidential mailboxes are currently holding
documents.
This list does not list the passwords for the confidential mailboxes.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press REPORT.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
REPORT
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REPORT
5.CONF MAILBX LIST
SET
3. Press SET to start printing the report.
PRINTING REPORT
26/12 ’97 16:00 FAX 833 4423
*
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
CONFID. MAIL BOX REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
CONFID. MBOX#
CONFID. MBOX NAME
PGS.
01
02
03
04
LOUIS
1
3
4
2
ROBERTS
THOMAS
DILLON
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document Memory List
Follow this procedure to print a Document Memory List for all documents
currently stored in the memory.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press REPORT.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
REPORT
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REPORT
4.DOC. MEMORY LIST
SET
3. Press SET.
PRINTING REPORT
26/12 ’97 15:03 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
DOC. MEMORY LIST
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
TX/RX NO
5443
MODE
CONNECTION TEL/ID
PGS.
SET TIME
5 26/12 17:40
ST. TIME
00:33
SENDER NAME
R.LOUIS
DELAYED TX [#10]
J.SMITH
Received memory box list
Follow this procedure to list all documents currently received and held in
memory boxes.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press REPORT.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
REPORT
2. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REPORT
6.RX MEM. BOX LIST
14-16 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET
3. Press SET.
PRINTING REPORT
26/12 ’97 15:03 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
RECEIVED MEMORY BOX LIST
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
BOX#
66
FILE NAME
R.LOUIS
PGS.
1
Memory Clear Report
If a power failure occurs, the documents currently in the memory can be saved
for up to approximately 12 hours. If power is not restored to the fax within 12
hours, the documents in the fax memory will be lost. If this time limit has elapsed
by the time power is restored to the fax unit, as soon as power is restored a list of
documents deleted from the memory as a result of the power failure is printed
automatically.
26/12 ’97 14:22 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE, INC.
001
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
MEMORY CLEAR REPORT
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
MEMORY FILES DELETED
TX/RX NO
MODE
CONNECTION TEL/ID
PGS.
SET TIME
ST. TIME
SENDER NAME
0087
0089
0092
DELAYED TX
TRANSMIT
MEM. BOX TX
[ 01] ADAM BOOKS, CPA
[ 01] ADAM BOOKS, CPA
[ 02] JOHN BARRISTER, ESQ 2
1
3
01/01 16:05
01/01 16:31
01/01 16:45
00:30
-----
00:30
R.LOUIS
R.LOUIS
S.ROBERTS
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-18 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked
Questions
This chapter shows you how to perform the routine tasks required to keep the
fax unit operating at peak performance.
At the end of this chapter you are shown how to troubleshoot minor problems in
response to error messages in reports or the LCD display.
Removing Document Feed Jams ............................................................................ 15-2
Removing Printer Feed Jams .................................................................................. 15-3
Storing Recording Paper ........................................................................................ 15-13
Recommended Paper .................................................................................. 15-13
Storing the Paper Supply ............................................................................ 15-13
Changing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................... 15-14
Storing Toner Cartridges ........................................................................................ 15-17
Handling Cartridges .................................................................................... 15-17
Storing Cartridges ........................................................................................ 15-18
Periodic Cleaning .................................................................................................... 15-18
Cleaning the Fax Unit ................................................................................. 15-18
Opening and Closing the Operation Panel .............................................. 15-19
Cleaning the Scanning Area ...................................................................... 15-22
Refilling the Stamp Ink Compartment (Option) ................................................ 15-23
Error Code Table (listed by number) ................................................................... 15-24
List of LCD Display Messages (Alphabetic List) .............................................. 15-26
Questions and Answers .......................................................................................... 15-30
Can not Send Documents Correctly? ....................................................... 15-30
Can not Receive Documents Correctly? .................................................. 15-32
Can not Copy Documents? ........................................................................ 15-34
Having Other Problems? ............................................................................ 15-34
Recording the User Reminder Sheets ................................................................. 15-35
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
15-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing Document Feed Jams
To prevent frequent jams during document scanning, always check the pages
before you feed them into the fax. (Q6-2)
If a document is curled or wrinkled, make a copy of the original and scan the
copy.
A message tells you when a document feed jam has occurred:
CHECK DOCUMENT
1. Press STOP.
2. Open the operation panel.
100%
50%
0%
A4
3. Pull the document straight forward or backward to remove it.
100%
50%
0%
A4
Always open the operation panel before you attempt to remove a jammed
document.
15-2
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Close the operation panel and press down on it gently until you hear it lock
in place.
100%
50%
0%
A4
Removing Printer Feed Jams
Observe these guidelines when you are inspecting the fax for printer feed jams:
½
If the paper jam occurred as result of a power failure, restore power to the
fax unit by re-connecting it to the power source before you follow the
procedures below.
½
½
Never attempt to remove a paper cassette when power to the fax unit is off.
Make sure you check all the areas described below because paper jams can
occur at more than one location.
½
½
Follow the exact order of the steps below.
When removing the paper cassettes, remove them gently.
When a recording paper jam occurs in the paper path, the fax displays a message:
REC. PAPER JAM
To avoid possible damage to the fax unit, never remove a paper cassette when the
REC. PAPER JAM message is displayed before removing the paper jammed in
the fax unit.
The fixing area becomes very hot. Do not touch any parts in the fixing area when
you are removing a paper jam.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
15-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Printer cover
Fixing area
Output tray
2. Right cover
7. Side paper cassette
8. Exit paper cover
3. Feeder right cover
4. Feeder right cover
5. Front paper cassette (upper)
6. Front paper cassette
(lower, option)
The additional FXL-CASSETTE FEEDER 5 is an option.
1. To remove the toner cartridge, pull up the lever above the į mark on the
printer cover.
100%
50%
0%
A4
Raise the printer cover and remove the toner cartridge.
100%
50%
0%
A4
15-4
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To protect the toner cartridge from light, insert it in the original bag you saved at
installation, or wrap the toner cartridge in a cloth.
2. Open the right cover.
100%
50%
0%
A4
Check the toner cartridge compartment. If you see any paper in the toner
cartridge compartment, remove it. While keeping the edge of the paper
down, pull the jammed paper carefully forward to remove it.
100%
50%
0%
A4
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
15-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the trailing edge of the jammed paper is under the cover, use both hands to
pull the paper up. After the trailing edge is free, pull the jammed paper forward
carefully to remove it.
Be careful not to make your hands dirty with the unfixed toner.
100%
50%
0%
A4
Avoid touching anything inside the fax.
100%
50%
0%
A4
If you see any paper in this area, pull it in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
100%
50%
0%
A4
15-6
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To avoid tearing the jammed paper, pull the paper straight down. Never pull it up
or to the side.
100%
50%
0%
A4
3. Open the feeder right cover of the front paper cassette. If you see any paper
in this area, pull it out.
100%
50%
0%
A4
4. If you have the optional FXL-CASSETTE FEEDER 5 attached, open the
lower feeder right cover. If you see any paper in this area, pull it out.
100%
50%
0%
A4
100%
50%
0%
A4
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
15-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull out the front paper cassette.
100%
50%
0%
A4
100%
50%
0%
A4
If you see any torn, curled, or wrinkled paper, remove it. Make sure the
paper stack is below the tabs.
Make sure there is no paper left inside the fax.
6. If you have the optional FXL-CASSETTE FEEDER 5 attached, open and
remove the lower front paper cassette.
100%
50%
0%
A4
If you see any torn, curled, or wrinkled paper, remove it. Make sure the
paper stack is below the tabs.
Make sure there is no paper left inside the fax.
15-8
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Before you remove the side cassette, remove the output tray and document
tray.
Remove the side paper cassette.
After you remove the side paper cassette, make sure no paper is hanging over
the rear edge of the paper cassette.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
15-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you see any folded, torn, or curled paper, remove it.
Make sure there is no paper remaining inside the fax unit where you removed
the cassette. If you see any paper inside the fax unit, remove it.
Check the side paper cassette selectors and make sure they are set for the
type of paper loaded in the side paper cassette.
Make sure the stack of paper is firmly against the sides of the paper cassette
and below the tabs.
Then set the side paper cassette aside.
15-10 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. To unlock and open the exit paper cover, pull up on the release button on the
right side.
Lower the exit paper cover.
If you see any jammed paper in this area, pull the paper straight out to
avoid tearing it.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always gently pull the jammed paper straight out, never at an angle.
If the paper will not come out of the paper exit, push up on the pressure
release button inside the paper exit, then pull the jammed paper straight out.
9. This concludes the procedure for checking the paper path for paper jams.
Close all the covers and re-insert all the paper cassettes and trays.
15-12 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing Recording Paper
Use only the recommended paper or paper of similar quality, and store it
carefully. When installing the recording paper, refer to page 2-25.
Recommended Paper
We recommend using Canon paper with this fax machine.
Quality Use plain bond, typewriter quality without curls, folds, or rough edges.
Weight
Storage 18gC to 24gC
40%-60% relative humidity
64-90 g/m2
½
Before buying large quantities of other paper, test it with the fax to make
sure it is reliable.
½
½
Use only plain white paper. Do not used perforated or coloured paper.
Paper that is either too smooth or rough may reduce print quality or cause
printer jams.
Storing the Paper Supply
Improper paper storage can affect the quality of the printing. Follow these
guidelines when you store paper.
½
½
½
Store unused paper in its wrapping to protect the paper against humidity.
Do not store paper on the floor where humidity is higher.
If the humidity of the surrounding area is higher than normal, store the paper
in a specially designed storage box.
½
½
½
To prevent excessive paper curl, do not stack paper too high.
Do not expose the stored paper supply to direct sunlight.
If paper is moved to a location of very different temperature, store the paper
in the new location for at least one day before you use it.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Toner Cartridge
CHANGE CARTRIDGE
When the toner runs low in the toner cartridge, the CHANGE CARTRIDGE
indicator on the operation panel will light and you will see this message:
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
The fax may be set to continue printing or to store the remainder of a document
being received into the memory.
You may be able to extend the service life of the toner cartridge by removing it
and rotating it 5 or 6 times to re-distribute the toner inside the cartridge. After
you re-set the cartridge in the fax unit, if the messages goes off, you can continue
printing but make sure you have a new cartridge on hand to replace the old one
when it finally runs out of toner. If the message does not go off, then you will
have to follow the procedure below to replace the old cartridge.
Follow this procedure to replace the toner cartridge.
1. Pull up the lever above the į mark on the printer cover.
100%
50%
0%
A4
2. Raise the printer cover.
100%
50%
0%
A4
15-14 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the old cartridge and discard it. Do not attempt to disassemble the
cartridge or refill the cartridge.
Do not incinerate the cartridge. Scattered toner powder is highly flammable.
To dispose of the cartridge:
To protect the environment, Canon has started a special program to help you
dispose of your empty toner cartridges.
After you install a toner cartridge, keep the original packing material.
Depending on the country of purchase, you may be able to have your empty
toner cartridge picked up for disposal at Canon’s expense. For details about
this special program to protect the environment, contact your local Canon
supplier or sales representative.
4. Remove a new toner cartridge from its protective bag. Hold the cartridge by
the ends and avoid touching the top and bottom of the cartridge.
Save the protective bag. You may need it to transport the cartridge later.
5. Rock the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside
the cartridge.
6. Place the cartridge on a flat, clean surface.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. As you steady the cartridge with one hand, remove the seal by gently pulling
the plastic tab with your other hand.
Use a firm, even pull to avoid breaking the seal.
Pull in this direction
Top view
Side view
Pull in this direction
8. To avoid pinching your fingers between the toner cartridge and fax unit, grip
the cartridge as shown below.
Keep drum slot free of dust and
other foreign objects.
Do not touch the
protective shutter on
bottom of cartridge.
9. Load the cartridge in the direction indicated by the arrow. Gently slide the
cartridge into the printer until it is completely down inside the fax unit and
level.
100%
50%
0%
L
TR
15-16 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Carefully close the printer cover and make sure it is locked.
100%
50%
0%
L
TR
½
½
½
If the printer cover does not shut completely, do not force it down.
Remove the toner cartridge and insert it again.
To avoid exposing the light sensitive drum, never leave the printer cover
open.
The fax unit will not operate if the cover is not closed completely. If the
printer cover is open you will see a message:
CHECK PRINTER COVER
Open the printer cover again and make sure the toner cartridge is sitting level
and close the printer cover again.
Storing Toner Cartridges
Follow these simple guidelines when you handle and store toner cartridges.
Handling Cartridges
½
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its protective bag until you are ready
to install it.
½
½
½
Save the protective bag. You may need it later to re-pack the cartridge
temporarily to protect it from exposure to light.
Never expose a toner cartridge to direct sunlight, and do not leave it exposed
to normal room light (about 1,000 lux) for longer than 5 minutes.
There are strong magnets inside a toner cartridge. To avoid possible
destruction of valuable data on disks or other media, keep the toner cartridge
away from computer screens, hard disks, floppy disks, or any other kind of
material sensitive to magnetic fields.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
Never touch or try to open the protective shutter that protects the light-
sensitive drum inside the toner cartridge. If the drum is exposed to light, this
can cause printing quality to deteriorate.
½
½
Handle the toner cartridge with care. Do not subject it to shock or vibrations.
Always set toner cartridges down with the arrow on the cartridge facing up.
Storing Cartridges
½
Store a toner cartridge in the original box and protective bag until you are
ready to install it.
½
Store toner cartridges at a constant temperature within a range of 0gC to
35gC. Do not store cartridges in places subject to extreme fluctuation of
temperature or humidity.
½
To prevent caking in the toner, never stand the cartridge on its end and do
not store it upside down. If the toner becomes caked as a result of being
stored in an odd position for too long, it may be impossible to dissolve it
completely even by shaking the cartridge.
½
½
½
Do not store the cartridge in salty or corrosive air.
Never attempt to disassemble a toner cartridge or attempt to refill it.
Make sure that you use a stored toner cartridge before the expiration date
printed on the toner cartridge box.
Periodic Cleaning
Follow these simple procedures to keep the fax clean and operating smoothly.
Before you clean the fax, print all documents received in the memory.
Cleaning the Fax Unit
1. Before you clean the fax, disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from the
power source.
15-18 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Moisten a soft cloth with water and a small amount of diluted mild detergent.
200 – 240 V AC
POWER OUTLET
To prevent damage to the surface of the fax unit, never use thinner, benzene,
alcohol, acetone, or any other organic solvent to clean the fax.
Opening and Closing the Operation Panel
Follow this procedure to open and close the operation panel in order to clean the
scanning glass or to re-fill the stamp ink (option).
Opening the Operation Panel
Follow this procedure to open and close the operation panel in order to clean the
scanning glass or to re-fill the ink pad for the stamp feature.
1. Disconnect the power cord of the fax unit at the power source.
2. Remove the document tray.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift the operation panel up until it stops.
100%
50%
0%
A4
4. While holding the operation panel open with one hand, use one finger of your
other hand to gently push in the black plastic loop to separate it from the stub
on the fax machine.
100%
50%
0%
A4
5. Lift the operation panel up to the open position.
100%
50%
0%
A4
15-20 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. You can now clean the scanning glass. (Q15-22)
-or-
Re-fill the stamp pad. (Q15-23)
Closing the Operation Panel
1. Lower the operation panel until the plastic loop is even with the stub on the
fax machine.
2. Place the end of the plastic loop over the end of the stub so it locks in place.
100%
50%
0%
A4
3. Close the operation panel and press down on it slightly until you hear it lock
in place.
4. Re-attach the document tray you removed earlier.
5. Connect the power cord of the fax unit at the power source.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Scanning Area
Periodically check the scanning glass, the white scanning strip, and rollers. If the
underside of the operation panel or the scanning glass is dirty, the documents you
send will look dirty.
1. Disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from its power source and remove
the document tray and open the operation panel. (Q15-19)
100%
50%
0%
A4
2. Use a soft, dry cloth to wipe clean the scanning glass, the white strip above,
rollers and the area around the glass. Use a soft cloth that will not scratch the
scanning glass.
White strip
Scanning glass
Rollers
Rollers
100%
50%
0%
L
TR
½
½
Use the dry cloth to wipe clean the underside of the operation panel.
Use the dry cloth to wipe up paper dust around the rollers.
15-22 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Close the operation panel, re-attach the document tray and connect the
power cord of the fax unit to the power source. (Q15-21)
Refilling the Stamp Ink Compartment (Option)
Follow this procedure to refill the stamp ink compartment if you are using the
optional stamp feature.
1. Disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from its power source, remove the
document tray, and open the operation panel. (Q15-19)
100%
50%
0%
A4
2. Locate the stamp pad then apply only one drop of ink to the stamp ink
compartment.
½
½
½
To avoid a malfunction, do not add too much ink.
Use only Shachihata X Stamper Ink CS-20 Yellow.
Do not use the stamp feature for at least one hour. If you have to send a
document, turn off the stamp feature for the first hour. (Q16-11)
100%
50%
0%
L
TR
To avoid ink spillage, apply only one drop of ink to the stamp pad.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Close the operation panel, re-attach the document tray and connect the
power cord of the fax unit to the power source. (Q12-10)
Make sure that you do not drip ink on any other part of the fax, and do not fill
the ink well so it overflows.
Error Code Table (listed by number)
Errors in reports are recorded as numbers because there is not enough space to
print a detailed description of the error in the report. When errors are recorded
in your reports, note the number and check it against the table below to learn
more about what caused the error.
CODE
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
#001
A document may be jammed in the automatic
document feeder (ADF).
Remove the jammed document and try again.
(Q15-2)
#003
#005
The document is longer than 1 meter.
Make a reduced copy of the document with a copy
machine and then send the copy, or cut the
document and paste it up on smaller sheets of paper.
(QB-2)
The other party’s fax did not respond within 35
seconds.
Send the document again. Contact the other party
and have them check their fax. You can try to send
the document manually. For an overseas call, add
pauses to the registered number.
The other party is not using a G3 fax.
You can not do polling sending.
Check with the other party and have them send or
receive the document using a G3 machine.
#008
#009
Make sure the subaddress/passwords match the
settings on the other party’s fax unit. If the other
party’s fax is Canon fax and can set a polling ID,
request that they set the polling ID to 255 decimal or
1111 1111 binary.
The paper cassette on your fax is out of paper.
Re-fill the paper cassette and make sure the stack is
below the tabs. (Q2-22)
If the paper cassette still has paper in it, then the
paper cassette may not be installed correctly.
Check all paper cassettes and make sure they are
installed correctly.
Recording paper jammed.
Remove the jammed paper. (Q15-3)
#011
#012
If you are polling a fax to receive a document, the
other party has not set the document correctly on the
other fax.
Contact the other party and request that the
document be set correctly for polling on the other
fax.
The other fax has run out of paper and its memory is
full.
Contact the other party and tell them to re-fill their
paper cassette.
15-24 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CODE
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
#018
The other fax does not answer, even after several
redialling attempts, or the other fax was busy and
unable to respond within 35 seconds.
Wait a few minutes and try again. If you still can not
send the document, contact the other party and
confirm that the other fax has been turned on. If the
other fax is busy, try sending your document at a
later time. When you send documents long distance,
open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels and
press PAUSE after dialling. (Q6-9)
#021
You can not be polling receiving.
Make sure the subaddress/passwords match the
settings on the other party’s fax unit. If the other
party’s fax is a Canon fax and can set a polling ID,
request that they set the polling ID to 255 decimal or
1111 1111 binary.
#022
#025
The settings for the One-touch or Coded Speed
dialling buttons you are using to dial the other party
have been deleted.
Correct the One-touch or Coded Speed dial
registration settings. (Q4-6, 4-14)
During registration of the number for One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialling, you registered the number for
confidential or relay sending but you omitted the
subaddress.
Open the optional settings for One-touch or Coded
Speed Dialling and make sure that you have entered
a subaddress and password (if required) for the
telephone number. (Q4-6, 4-14)
After setting up relay sending or confidential sending, Open the settings for One-touch or Coded Speed
the settings for One-touch or Coded Speed dialling
may have been changed.
Dialling and make sure the settings have not been
changed. (Q4-6, 4-14)
#033
You have attempted to send a confidential document
to a fax unit that does not support the use of ITU-T
subaddresses.
Send the document without confidential settings, or
send the document to a fax that supports the use of
ITU-T subaddresses.
#034
#035
#036
#037
You sent a confidential document to another fax unit
but it was rejected.
Contact the other party and confirm the settings on
the other party’s confidential mailbox.
You have attempted to relay a document to a fax unit Send the document by regular transmission.
that does not support the use of ITU-T subaddresses.
You have attempted to relay a document to a fax unit Contact the other party and confirm that their relay
but it was rejected.
settings match the relay settings on your fax unit.
The memory in your fax is full and can not store a
document for sending or receiving.
Before you try to to clear the memory, you may
want to print a memory list for reference. (Q8-4)
If there are documents in the memory that you do
not need, erase those documents from the memory.
(Q8-8)
#059
The number you had dialled did not match with the
registered number on the other party’s fax. The
number is not registered on the other party’s fax or
the number registered on the other party’s fax is not
correct.
Call the other party and ask the other party to
register the number or to correct the number. Or, set
PHONE NO. CHECK of the system setting to OFF
on your fax. (Q16-26)
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CODE
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
#080
The other party’s fax does not support receiving a
document with a subaddress.
Call the other party and confirm whether or not
their fax supports subaddress receiving. Try sending
again without a subaddress.
#081
#082
#083
#084
The other party’s fax does not support receiving a
document with an ITU-T password.
Call the other party and confirm whether or not
their fax supports ITU-T password receiving. Try
sending again without a password.
The other party’s fax does not support accepting a
polling request with a subaddress.
Call the other party and confirm whether or not
their fax can accept a polling request with a
subaddress. Try sending again without a subaddress.
You can not poll the other party to receive a
document because a subaddress and/or password does and/or password that you are using are correct.
not match.
Call the other party and confirm that the subaddress
The other party can not receive a document with an
ITU-T password.
Call the other party and confirm whether or not the
other party’s fax supports receiving a polling request
with an ITU-T password. Ask the other party to try
again without an ITU-T password.
#102
#995
You can not receive documents because a subaddress
and/or password does not match.
Call the other party and confirm whether or not you
are using the correct subaddress and/or password.
Documents in the memory to be sent have been
cleared.
The current transmission has been cleared. You may
start again, start a new operation, or leave the fax in
standby.
List of LCD Display Messages (Alphabetic
List)
Here is a list of messages that are displayed on the screen when a problem occurs
in the fax or the printer.
MESSAGE
WHAT IT MEANS
#ALREADY IN USE
The box number you entered is already in use. For example, you can not use the
same box number for a confidential mailbox and a polling box. Try again with
another box number.
AUTO REDIAL
The other party’s line was busy on the previous dialling attempt and your fax unit is
dialling the number again. To cancel redialling, press STOP when direct dialling or
press DELETE FILE, select transaction number then press SET when memory
sending.
BUSY/NO SIGNAL
The other party did not answer, even after redialling. Wait for a few minutes and try
again. When you send documents long distance, press PAUSE after dialling. If you
still can not send the document, the other party may have turned off their fax unit.
15-26 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE
WHAT IT MEANS
CHECK DOCUMENT
A document page may be jammed or may not be fed correctly in the automatic
document feeder (ADF). Remove the document and try again. (Q15-2) If the
document does not feed correctly, clean the rollers. (Q15-22)
CHECK POLLING ID
CHECK PRINTER
Your attempt at polling receiving failed. The polling ID may be incorrect or your
subaddress/password does not match the subaddress/password set on the polling box
of the other party’s fax unit. Contact the other party and make sure you are using
the correct polling ID or subaddress/password. (Q11-3)
Printer malfunction. Press STOP. Unplug the fax unit from its power source, wait a
few minutes, then plug in power cord again. If the fax is connected to an
uninterruptable power supply (UPS), unplug the power cord, and then plug it into
an AC outlet. If message remains in the LCD display and the fax unit can not return
to standby, call for service.
CHECK PRINTER COVER
Check the printer cover, right cover, and exit cover and make sure that they are
completely closed. Make sure a toner cartridge is installed under the printer cover.
CHECK SUBADDR/PASSWD You attempted sending or polling receiving with an incorrect subaddress/password.
Contact the other party and confirm that you are using the correct subaddress/
password.
COMMUNICATING PLEASE You tried to use direct sending while the fax was sending another document. Wait
WAIT
until the transmission is finished, then try again.
DOCUMENT TOO LONG
The document is longer than 1 meter. Cut the document into smaller sheets. Reduce
them on a copy machine if necessary. Then paste them on standard letter or A4-size
sheets for scanning.
HANG UP PHONE
MEMORY FULL
The transaction has completed but the handset is not sitting completely on its
cradle. Make sure the handset is sitting completely on its cradle.
The memory is full. If the document has been received in the memory, print the
document. (Q8-2)
If documents have been received in confidential mailboxes, print them. (Q10-7)
If documents have been received in memory boxes, print them. (Q8-23)
Check the content of the memory and if there are documents in the memory that
you do not need, delete them from the memory. (Q8-8)
If you tried to send a document with “SUPER FINE” or “TEXT/PHOTO”, try
sending by direct sending, or set to “FINE” or “TEXT” and send by memory
sending.
MEMORY FULL
PLEASE WAIT
The memory is full. Wait until the current document transmission has completed.
NO ANSWER
The other party did not answer. Start the procedure again from the beginning and
try again. If the connection fails again, make sure the other party is using a G3-
compatible fax machine.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE
NO CONFID. TX
WHAT IT MEANS
The other party’s fax unit may not support the use of confidential mailboxes.
Contact the other party and confirm whether or not they can set up confidential
mailboxes.
You may be using the wrong ITU-T subaddress/password. Contact the other party
and make sure you are using the correct subaddress/password.
The memory of the other party’s fax unit may be full. Contact the other party and
request that they clear the memory on their fax unit.
NO DOC. STORED
You have tried to check the contents of the memory but no documents are currently
stored in the memory.
NO ORIGINAL RELAY TX
The other party’s fax unit may not be able to function as a relay station, or it may
not be set up correctly to receive and relay documents. Contact the other party and
make sure it can function as a relay station.
If the fax unit can be set up as relay station, confirm that it is set up correctly for
relay transmissions. Make sure you have both registered the same ITU-T
subaddress/password.
If the memory of the other party’s fax unit is full, it will not be able to receive and
relay documents. Ask them to clear part or all of the memory on their fax unit.
NO RX PAPER
NO TEL#
The other party’s fax unit has run out of paper and can not receive your document.
Contact the other party and ask them to re-supply recording paper to their fax unit.
You have pressed a One-touch Speed Dialling button, or pressed CODED DIAL
followed by a 3-digit code, but no telephone number is registered. If you have
forgotten where the number is registered, use directory dial. (Q4-31) You can also
print a list of all numbers registered for speed dialling. (Q14-2)
NOT AVAILABLE NOW
You pressed a One-touch Speed Dialling, or pressed CODED DIAL followed by a
3-digit code, that is not registered for the feature you are trying to use.
NOT FOUND,TRY AGAIN
PASSWORD POLL REJECT
The box number you specified does not exist. Try again with a different number.
You set up a polling box for polling sending with an ITU-T password, but the other
party’s fax unit does not support use of an ITU-T password for polling receiving.
PASSWORD TX REJECT
You attempted to send a document with an ITU-T password, but the other party’s
fax unit does not support use of an ITU-T password for receiving.
PRT ALT. PAPER SIZE?
The size of the available recording paper does not match the size of the document
YES=( ) NO=(#)
waiting to be printed. If you do not mind printing on a different paper size, press
If you want to print the correct paper size, press STOP and install the correct size
paper. Then press START/SCAN.
.
*
*
REC. PAPER JAM
Paper has jammed in the paper cassette or inside the printer. Clear the paper jam.
(Q15-3)
15-28 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE
WHAT IT MEANS
RECEIVED IN MAILBOX
A confidential document has arrived in a mailbox of your fax unit, and the message
will remain displayed until you print the document. (Q10-8)
RECEIVED IN MEMORY
The fax unit has run out of recording paper or the toner supply of the toner
cartridge is exhausted. Supply paper to the paper cassettes or change the toner
cartridge. As soon as you accomplish this task, the document prints automatically.
(Q8-2)
RECEIVED IN MEM. BOX
You have received a document in a memory box. Print out the document in the
memory box. (Q8-23)
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
USER ACCESS CODE
ENTER DAC
The toner cartridge has run out of toner. Replace the toner cartridge. (Q15-14)
You have to enter user access code to send, copy or print reports.
You have to enter department access code to send decoment.
SELECTIVE POLL REJECT
You have set up a polling box for polling sending with an ITU-T subaddress, but the
other party’s fax unit does not support use of an ITU-T subaddress for polling
receiving.
START AGAIN
An error has occurred on the telephone line or in your fax unit. Start the procedure
from the beginning. If the problem persists, call for service.
STOP KEY PRESSED
SUBADDRESS TX REJECT
You have pressed the STOP button to cancel the current transaction. The fax unit
should return to standby in a few moments.
You attempted to send a document with an ITU-T subaddress, but the other party’s
fax unit does not support receiving a document with an ITU-T subaddress.
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
USER ACCESS LOCK
Your fax unit has run out of paper. Re-fill the paper cassettes. (Q2-22)
Sending or printing have been restricted. Set the TX SETTING or PRINTER
SETTING of the restrictive codes to OFF. (Q13-12)
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers
Can not Send Documents Correctly?
½ Can not send after dialling?
Is the document set in the automatic document feeder (ADF) correctly?
Remove the document and set it correctly. (Q6-2, 15-2)
Is the number dialling correctly?
Check the number registered for the speed dialling button and make sure
it is correct. You may want to print a list of all registered speed dialling
buttons. (Q14-2) If you do not have time to check and correct the
registration immediately, use regular dialling. (Q6-7)
Is the other fax out of paper?
Call the other party and make sure their fax is supplied with paper.
Are the rollers dirty?
Clean the rollers. (Q15-22)
½ Does memory fill up immediately when you try to send?
Are the document mode settings on?
The FINE, SUPER FINE, or TEXT/PHOTO settings can use large
amounts of memory when scanning certain types of documents. Use direct
sending. (Q6-13)
½ Are documents streaked with lines after they print on the other
fax?
Is the scanning glass on your fax clean?
Copy a document on your fax and see if the copy is streaked or dirty. If the
print is streaked, clean the scanning glass. (Q15-22)
½ Are your documents printing at a reduced size on the other fax?
Are the document feed guides set properly when you scan documents for
sending?
Make sure the document feed guides are snug against the side of the
document you scan for sending. (Q6-3)
½ Are the documents you send too light?
Is the LIGHTER indicator on your operation panel on?
Press the CONTRAST button until STANDARD or DARKER is
selected. (Q6-4)
15-30 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Is your document too light?
Press the CONTRAST button until DARKER is selected then try sending
again. (Q6-4)
Is the scanning glass on your fax clean?
Copy a document on your fax and see if the copy is streaked or dirty. If the
copy is streaked or dirty, clean the scanning glass. (Q15-22)
½ Can not perform relay sending?
Does the relay unit support ITU-T subaddress/password transactions?
If the relay unit does not support ITU-T subaddress/password transactions,
you can not perform relay sending.
Has the relay unit set up a relay group correctly?
The relay group must be set up correctly on the relay unit and the relay
unit must tell you the subaddress and password. If the relay unit has set a
ITU-T password, then you must send the document with the correct
password as well as the correct subaddress. (Q9-8)
Does the ITU-T subaddress/password match those of the relay unit?
Make sure you set the correct subaddress/password. (Q9-9)
Is the memory of the relay unit full?
Check with the relay unit and make sure there is enough memory to
receive your document. Ask the relay unit to clear their memory then try
again.
½ Can not perform confidential sending?
Does the other fax support ITU-T subaddress/password transactions?
If the other fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/password transactions,
you can not perform confidential sending.
Has the other party set up a confidential mailbox?
The other party must set up a confidential mailbox on the other fax and
tell you the subaddress and password. If the other party has set a ITU-T
password, then you must send the document with the correct password as
well as the correct subaddress. (Q10-9)
Does the ITU-T subaddress/password match those of the other party?
Make sure you set the correct subaddress/password. (Q10-9)
Is the memory of the other fax full?
Check with the other party and make sure there is enough memory to
receive your document. Ask the other party to clear their memory then try
again.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½ Can not relay a document from another fax?
Does the other fax unit support subaddress/password transactions?
If the other party’s fax does not support subaddress/password transactions,
you can not relay documents.
Make sure you have both registered the same ITU-T subaddress/password.
(Q9-2)
Is your fax set up to relay documents?
Make sure your fax is set up properly to relay documents. The relay
feature must be turned on. (Q9-3)
Does the other party’s fax support ITU-T subaddresses and passwords?
Contact the other party and confirm that they called you with the correct
subaddress/password.
Are the originator’s subaddress/password correct?
The originator must send you the document with the correct ITU-T
subaddress/password.
The ITU-T password setting is optional. However, if you set a password on
your relay TX group then the originator must send a password. Otherwise,
your fax will not receive the document for relay broadcasting. (Q9-3)
Check the relay TX group and determine if it has been set to check the
identity of the originator before it receives the document for a relay
broadcast. (Q9-6)
½ Other party can not poll and receive your document?
Does the other party’s fax support ITU-T subaddress/password sending?
If the other party’s fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/password, you
have to make a polling box #00 for the other party and scan the document
without subaddress/password. (Q11-13) If the other party’s fax is a Canon
fax and can set a polling ID, ask them to set the polling ID for 255 decimal
or 1111 1111 binary.
Can not Receive Documents Correctly?
½ Can not receive documents automatically?
Is the MANUAL RX indicator on your operation panel on?
If this indicator is on, press the button below MANUAL RX to turn it off.
(Q7-2)
15-32 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½ Can not receive manually?
Is there a document set in the automatic document feeder (ADF)?
You can not receive with a document set in the automatic document feeder
(ADF). Remove the document and try again. (Q15-2)
Did you press START/SCAN before you hung up the handset?
When you hear a high pitched tone, press START/SCAN before you hang
up the handset. Review the procedure for manual receiving with the
optional handset kit installed on the fax. (Q7-7)
½ Are the documents you receive of poor quality?
Is your toner cartridge running low on toner?
Remove your toner cartridge and rotate it 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute
the remaining toner and try again. If this does not solve the problem, you
should change the toner cartridge. (Q15-14)
Is the other fax functioning properly?
The sending fax usually determines image quality. Try copying a document
on your own fax. If the copy is clean then the other fax has a problem. Call
the other party and ask them to clean the scanning glass on the other fax.
½ Can not receive a confidential document in your confidential
mailbox?
Does the other party’s fax support subaddress/password transactions?
If the other party’s fax does not support subaddress/password transactions,
you can not receive confidential documents.
Make sure the other party knows the correct subaddress/password for your
confidential mailbox.
½ Can not poll another fax and receive its document?
Are you polling without a subaddress/password?
If the other party’s fax is a Canon fax and can set a polling ID, ask them to
set the polling ID for 255 decimal or 1111 1111 binary.
Are you polling with a subaddress or password?
Contact the other party and confirm that their fax supports receiving a
polling request with a subaddress or password.
If the other party’s fax supports subaddress/password polling, confirm that
you are using the correct subaddress and password.
If the other party’s fax does not support subaddress/password polling, call
the other party without subaddress/password. (Q11-3)
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Can not Copy Documents?
½ Can not copy?
Is the toner cartridge out of toner?
Change the toner cartridge. (Q15-14)
½ Is the copied document reduced?
Are the document feed guides snug against the sides of the document that
you are copying?
Make sure the document feed guides are both against the sides of the
document in the automatic document feeder (ADF) before you start
copying. (Q5-3)
½ Are copied document cut at the margins?
Are the document guides on the side paper cassette set for the width of the
paper loaded in the cassette?
Adjust the document guides to the width of the paper loaded in the paper
cassette. (Q2-22)
Having Other Problems?
½ Is sending and receiving documents too slow?
When sending, is the document mode set for SUPER FINE, FINE, or TEXT/
PHOTO?
If the indicator for SUPER FINE, FINE, or TEXT/PHOTO is on, press
RESOLUTION to select STANDARD, or press DOCUMENT TYPE to
select TEXT. (Q6-4)
Is your fax set for ECM receiving or sending?
Because the fax is constantly checking for errors during transmission, ECM
receiving and sending require more time. The fax is set to conduct all
transactions using ECM (error correction mode). If transmission speed
appears to be extremely slow, you may be able to speed up transmission
time by turning ECM off. (Q16-9, 16-12)
½ Can not get faxes from information services?
Is your fax connected to a rotary dial telephone line?
Even if your fax is connected to a rotary dial line, you can still get faxes
from information services that require tone dialling. Press TONE to
receive faxes from information services that require touch-tone telephone
lines for transmission. (Q12-3)
15-34 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording the User Reminder Sheets
The user reminder sheets are essential for recording the passwords, box numbers,
subaddresses, and so on, so you do not forget them. We recommend that you
make a copy of these sheets, fill them out, and use them for reference.
After you fill out these reminder sheets, store them in a safe place to protect their
confidentiality and so you can find them later for reference.
Password Reminder
Item
Description
Password (four-digit)
System Settings
Protects the user data System
Settings from unauthorized access.
Sending Restrictions
Printing Restrictions
Memory Reception
Restricts document sending to
holders of the User Access Code.
Restricts report printing and
document copying.
Protects your MEMORY
RECEPTION button setup from
unauthorized access.
Transfer
Protects your TRANSFER button
setup from unauthorized access.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Department Access Code
Dept. Access Code
(four-digit)
Password
(four-digit)
Dept. Access Code
(four-digit)
Password
(four-digit)
Preset Polling
Box No.
(two-digit)
Box Name
Password
(four-digit)
15-36 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Confidential Mailboxes
Box No.
(two-digit)
Box Name
Password
(four-digit)
Subaddress
(Max. 20-digit) (Max. 20-digit)
RX Password
Relay Broadcast Groups
Group No.
(two-digit)
Group Name
Password
(four-digit)
Subaddress
(Max. 20-digit) (Max. 20-digit)
RX Password
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Boxes
Box No.
(two-digit)
Box Name
Password
(four-digit)
Subaddress
(Max. 20-digit)
TX Password
(Max. 20-digit)
RX Password
(Max. 20-digit)
Polling Boxes
Box No.
(two-digit)
Box Name
Password
(four-digit)
Subaddress
(Max. 20-digit)
TX Password
(Max. 20-digit)
15-38 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings
This chapter contains a comprehensive list of all the settings you can perform
with the DATA REGISTRATION Menus.
The settings that determine how the fax unit operates are called user data
settings. These important settings can be switched on and off to customize
operation of the fax unit.
Opening the Data Registration Menu ................................................................... 16-2
Summary of User Data Settings ............................................................................. 16-3
User Settings .............................................................................................................. 16-4
Report Settings .......................................................................................................... 16-7
TX (Send) Settings ................................................................................................... 16-9
RX (Receive) Settings ............................................................................................ 16-12
Printer Settings ........................................................................................................ 16-14
File Settings ............................................................................................................. 16-17
System Settings ........................................................................................................ 16-23
Relationship between BATCH TX, QUICK ON-LINE TX, and Timer
Settings ..................................................................................................................... 16-27
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings
16-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Opening the Data Registration Menu
Follow this procedure to display the user data settings.
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET to display the next menu.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
3. Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SET
4. Display the item you want to set or change and press SET. For details, refer
to the following section.
The user data menu selections are displayed one line at a time. Use the
search buttons to display these settings so you can check the settings or
change them.
16-2
Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Summary of User Data Settings
Here is a summary of the user data menus.
1.USER SETTINGS
Use these settings to set up the operating environment of the fax unit. These
settings include important features like registering the names, telephone number
and the date and time that prints on documents you send, setting alarms and
scanning density, and so on. Do these settings as soon as you set up your fax.
After they are set, you should not need to change them very often. (Q16-4)
2.REPORT SETTINGS
Use these settings to set the fax to print a report every time you send or receive a
document and set up printing a summary report for all your sending and
receiving transactions. Use these features to keep track of your fax transactions.
(Q16-7)
3.TX (Send) SETTINGS
Use these settings to customize how the fax sends documents. With these settings
you can turn ECM on and off, set mid-pause time, set up re-dialling and other
features. (Q16-9)
4.RX (Receive) SETTINGS
Use these settings to customize how the fax receives documents. These settings
are important because they determine how the fax operates when it receives a
document. (Q16-12)
5.PRINTER SETTINGS
Use these settings to set how the fax unit prints documents you receive. These
features include selecting a cassette for paper supply, reducing the size of the
page, and the order of printing. (Q16-14)
6.FILE SETTINGS
Use these settings to set up major features like confidential mailboxes and
polling. (Q16-17)
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Use these settings to set up security and tracking features with passwords and
department passwords and codes. You can also set important defaults such as the
format in which the date and time will be displayed, selecting the display
language, and the sending and receiving start speeds. (Q16-24)
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings
16-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Settings
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
SET
3. Press SET.
USER SETTINGS
1.DATE & TIME
4. Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change.
*
Default settings are in bold.
1.DATE & TIME
Register the current date and time using the 24-hour system. (Q3-13)
Register your fax number. (Q3-13)
2.UNIT TELEPHONE #
3.UNIT NAME
Register your name or company name. (Q3-13)
4.SENDER’S NAME
Register up to 99 alternate sender names. Before you send a
document, press the TTI SELECTOR button and select a name to
replace the name you registered for 3.UNIT NAME. (Q3-17)
16-4
Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.TX TERMINAL ID
Print your ID (transmitting terminal ID) on each page you transmit.
(Q3-11)
ON
After you turn the terminal ID ON, you can do the following
settings.
1.TTI POSITION
OUTSIDE IMAGE
Terminal ID prints outside the image
border
INSIDE IMAGE
Terminal ID prints inside the image
border.
2.TELEPHONE # MARK
You can prefix your number with the
abbreviations FAX or TEL in your
sender ID.
FAX
Prefixes the number with the
abbreviation FAX.
TEL
Prefixes the number with the
abbreviation TEL.
OFF
No terminal ID is not printed on the pages you send.
6.DENSITY CONTROL
Adjust the scanning density from 1-5 for DK (2 is default), 2-6 for
STD (4 is default), 3-7 for LT (6 is default).
7. SCAN RESOLUTION
Set the default value for the SUPER FINE setting of the
RESOLUTION button on the operation panel. (Q6-4)
SUPER FINE
ULTRA FINE
Scans at 8 dots/mm, 15.4 lines/mm.
Scans at 16 dots/mm, 15.4 lines/mm.
8.PROGRAM KEY
Use the program button to streamline the procedures for printing
activity reports or doing the scanner settings. (Q12-4)
PRINT REPORT
Press the PROGRAM button whenever you need a transmission
report for a document you are sending.
REPORT
If you select this setting, you do not have to open both One-touch
Speed Dialling panels to start printing a report. Whenever you need
to print a report, press the PROGRAM button.
SCANNING MODE
STAMP
Set the scanner buttons (Resolution, Contrast, Document Type) for
special settings, like sending a photograph for example. Then you can
adjust all the settings just by pressing the PROGRAM button.
If you have installed the optional stamp feature, this option is
available. If you select STAMP you can turn the stamp feature on or
off without opening both One-touch Speed Dialling panels to press
the STAMP button.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings
16-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.OFFHOOK ALARM
Turn the off hook alarm off or on, which alerts you if the optional
handset is not in the handset cradle.
ON
Offhook alarm sounds if optional handset or extension telephone is
left off the hook.
OFF
No offhook alarm.
10.VOLUME CONTROL
1.KEYPAD VOLUME
2.ALARM VOLUME
11.TEL LINE TYPE
TOUCH TONE
Adjust the volume of the fax unit.
1 (0 to 3)
1 (0 to 3)
Set the telephone line type. (Q3-10)
The telephone line is set for touch-tone dialling.
ROTARY PULSE
The telephone line is set for rotary pulse dialling. If you need to dial
into an information service that requires tone dialling, use the
TONE/+ button on the operation panel. (Q12-3)
12.R-KEY SETTING
The R-KEY setting allows you to set how the fax connects to PBX. If
your fax unit is not connected through a PBX, you can ignore these
settings.
PSTN
The fax is connected to the outside line.
PBX
The fax is connected through a PBX. Select one of the following
settings, depending on the type of PBX in service. Three settings are
available:
HOOKING
EARTH CONNECTION
PREFIX
If you select PREFIX, you can set a
number up to 20 digits long.
16-6
Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Report Settings
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
3. Press the search buttons to display REPORT SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
2.REPORT SETTINGS
SET
4. Press SET.
REPORT SETTINGS
1.TX REPORT
5. Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change.
*
Default settings are in bold.
1.TX REPORT
PRINT ERROR ONLY
Print a transmission report. (Q14-10)
Print a report only if an error occurs.
OUTPUT YES
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE
ON
A report prints for every transmission.
Only available for PRINT ERROR ONLY or OUTPUT YES.
A prompt asks you to confirm whether to print the first page of
the document to remind you of what it contains.
OFF
No prompt appears and no first page is printed.
Print no report, even if an error occurs.
Print a reception activity report. (Q14-13)
No report prints for document receptions.
A report prints for reception errors only.
A report prints for every reception.
OUTPUT NO
2.RX REPORT
OUTPUT NO
PRINT ERROR ONLY
OUTPUT YES
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings
16-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.CONFID. RX REPORT
OUTPUT YES
Print a reception activity report every time you receive a document
in a confidential mailbox. (Q14-15)
A report prints every time a document is received in a confidential
mailbox.
OUTPUT NO
No report is printed when a document is received in a confidential
mailbox.
4.MEMORY BOX REPORT
OUTPUT YES
Print a reception activity report every time you receive a document
in a memory box. (Q14-16)
A report is printed every time a document is received in a memory
box.
OUTPUT NO
5.ACTIVITY REPORT
1.AUTO PRINT
No report is printed when a document is received in a memory box.
Print an activity management report. (Q14-8)
Print an activity report after every 40 transactions.
ON
An activity report prints after the 40th transaction is
completed.
OFF
No activity report prints after the 40th transaction is
completed.
2.DAILY REPORT TIME
3.TX/RX SEPARATE
OFF
A time is not set to print a transaction report every day.
ON
Allows you to set a time for an activity to be printed
every day. Set the report time for the daily report. Use
24-time settings.
Print activity report with receptions and transmissions listed
separately.
OFF
Transmissions and receptions are listed together in
chronological order.
ON
Transmissions and receptions are arranged in
chronological order in separate lists.
6.PRT REPORT WHERE
Select a paper supply source for the activity report.
OFF
Report prints from the first available paper supply source.
ON
The number and type of cassettes available depends on the paper
cassettes currently installed. The additional front paper cassette is
optional.
SIDE CASSETTE
FRONT CASSETT
With option cassette
SIDE CASSETTE
FRONT UPPER CAS.
FRONT LOWER CAS.
16-8
Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TX (Send) Settings
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
3. Press the search buttons to display TX SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
3.TX SETTINGS
SET
4. Press SET.
TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
5. Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change.
*
Default settings are in bold.
1.ECM TX
Turn ECM (error correction mode) transmission off and on. This
switch does not affect the button setups for One-touch or Coded
Speed dialling. (Q4-6, 4-14)
ON
All transmissions are conducted with ECM if the other party’s fax
supports ECM.
OFF
ECM is turned off.
2.MID PAUSE SET
Set the length of the pause entered between number when you
press the PAUSE button (01 to 15 sec.) (Q4-3)
02SEC
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings
16-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.AUTO REDIAL
Select whether to perform automatic redial when the other line is
busy or no answer. (Q6-16)
ON
Customize the redial operation.
1.REDIAL TIMES
From 01 to 10 times. (02TIMES)
From 02 to 99 minutes. (02MIN.)
2.REDIAL INTERVAL
3.TX ERROR RESEND
Set redialling to handle error
transmissions.
ON
Turn page resend off and on, and
select what pages to resend.
RESEND TX FROM
ERROR & 1ST PG
ERROR PAGE
ALL PAGES
OFF
No portion of a document is re-sent
after an error occurs.
OFF
After the first attempt at dialling fails, re-dialling is not attempted.
4.BATCH TX
If there is more than one document waiting in the memory to be sent
to the same destination, after the timer goes off to send the first
document, then all documents are sent together in the same
transmission. With this feature the fax unit makes one phone call
instead of faxing each document with a separate phone call. This
feature saves time and money. (Q16-27)
ON
OFF
5.QUICK ON-LINE TX
Turn quick memory sending off and on. When ON the fax unit starts
sending the document while it is still being scanned. (Q6-11)
ON
OFF
6.ERASE FAILED TX
Determine what happens to the document in the memory if an error
occurs during its transmission.
OFF
Document remains in the memory after an error occurs during
sending.
ON
Document is erased from the memory if an error occurs during
transmission.
16-10 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.TIME OUT
ON
Set the interval between dialling (entering phone numbers) when
sending to more than one destination. (Q6-20)
Fax scans the document in 5 or 10 seconds after you enter the
phone #.
OFF
Press START/SCAN to begin transmission. Otherwise, the fax unit
returns to standby.
8.TX STAMP
ON
Turn stamping off or on and how documents are to be stamped.
(Q12-7)
STAMP ACTION
DIRECT & MEMORY TX
Stamps only documents sent
direct and from memory.
DIRECT TX
Stamps documents sent with
direct sending only.
OFF
The stamp feature is turned off and disabled.
Note:
The stamp feature is available as an option. If the stamp option is not provided on your fax
machine, this item will not appear in the menu.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RX (Receive) Settings
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
3. Press the search buttons to display RX SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
4.RX SETTINGS
SET
4. Press SET.
RX SETTINGS
1.ECM RX
5. Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change.
*
Default settings are in bold.
1.ECM RX
Turn the ECM (error correction mode) receiving off and on. This
switch does not affect the button setups for One-touch or Coded
Speed Dialling. (Q4-6, 4-14)
ON
All receptions are conducted with ECM if the other party’s fax
supports ECM.
OFF
ECM is turned off.
2.MAN/AUTO SWITCH
Set the fax machine to switch to document receive mode after ringing
for a specified length of time in the manual receive mode.
16-12 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFF
The fax will keep ringing until someone answers the call manually
with the optional handset or a connected extension telephone.
ON
F/T RING TIME
Set the length of time to elapse
before the fax machine switches to
document receiving. Default: 15 sec.
(01-99 sec.)
3.REMOTE RX
Receive from a remote telephone with pre-set setting. (Q7-7)
ID CALL #
You can dial a number code on the remote extension to start
receiving a document. Default is 25. Setting range: 00 to 99.
HOOK
You can start receiving the document after you hang up the handset
of the extension telephone after you hear the slow beep of an
incoming document transmission. (You can receive documents using
this method only if the other party’s fax can send a CNG signal.)
OFF
Remote receiving is turned off and disabled.
4.MEMORY RX
Select how incoming documents are to be received in the memory if
the fax runs out of toner or paper. (Q8-2)
ON
Remainder of the fax is stored in the memory and can be printed out
as soon as you re-fill the paper cassette, change the toner cartridge or
clear the paper jam.
MEMORY RX ALARM
The memory alarm alerts you when a
document has been received in the
memory.
OFF
No alarm sounds when the fax runs
out of toner or recording paper
during document reception.
ON
An audible alarm sounds when the
fax runs out of toner or recording
paper and the remainder of the
document is stored temporarily in the
memory.
OFF
Memory receiving is turned off. If the fax runs out of toner or
recording paper during a document reception, the remainder of the
document is not saved in the memory. The other party must re-send
the document.
5.RX PAGE FOOTER
Print a footer in the lower right corner of every received page. The
footer contains the date, day, time received, transaction number, and
page number. (Q3-12)
OFF
No RX FOOTER prints at the bottom of the page.
ON
Turns on printing of an RX FOOTER at the bottom of every page
you receive.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printer Settings
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
3. Press the search buttons to display PRINTER SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
5.PRINTER SETTINGS
SET
4. Press SET.
PRINTER SETTINGS
1.# OF RX COPIES
5. Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change.
16-14 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
Default settings are in bold.
1.# OF RX COPIES
2.SELECT CASSETTE
1.CASSETTE SW A
Select the number of copies (from 01 to 99) of received documents
you want printed. Default is 01 copy.
Select how you want over-size documents to be divided when the
paper in the paper cassette is too small.
Selects how legal-size documents are divided. This switch is effective
only when the side cassette is set to legal-size and out of legal-size
paper.
ON
Divide legal-size documents into
two pages.
OFF
Receive legal-size documents in
memory.
2.CASSETTE SW B
Selects how letter-size documents are received on larger paper. This
switch is effective only when the letter-size paper runs out.
ON
Prints the letter-size document on
the larger paper (with white space).
OFF
Prints the letter-size document in
the memory.
3.RX REDUCTION
Receive images at a reduced size.
Turns off image reduction.
Turns on image reduction.
1.RX REDUCTION
OFF
ON
AUTO SELECTION
The fax unit automatically reduces
the image to the size of the selected
paper.
FIXED REDUCTION
You set the reduction rate.
(75%, 90%, 95%, 97%)
2.SELECT REDUCE DIR
Select the direction of reduction for
the percentage of fixed reduction
selected above.
HORIZ & VERTICAL
Reduction performed in the
horizontal and vertical direction.
VERTICAL ONLY
Reduction performed in the vertical
direction only.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.PRINT IN ORDER
Set the order of printing.
OFF
Arrange received document pages in reverse order.
ON
Arrange received document pages in the order they were sent.
Printing does not start until all pages are received.
5.SELECT DENSITY
Adjust the print density of documents you receive. LT (Light), STD
(Standard), DK (Dark)
6.TONER SUPPLY LOW
Set the fax to continue printing even after toner runs low and the
CHANGE CARTRIDGE indicator lights and the REPLACE
CARTRIDGE message appears.
RX TO MEMORY
Stop printing and receive the remainder of the document in the
memory.
KEEP PRINTING
Ignore the warning and keep printing until the document is
completely printed.
16-16 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File Settings
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
3. Press the search buttons until you see FILE SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
SET
4. Press SET.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
5. Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change.
*
Default settings are in bold.
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
1.SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
Set up confidential mailbox. (Q10-2)
Set up a confidential mailbox.
Create a two-digit confidential mail box number.
1.FILE NAME
Give the mailbox a name up to 24 characters long.
2.PASSWORD
Assign a password to protect the mailbox from being changed or deleted.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T subaddress for reception.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password for reception.
Sets the number of copies printed from every document.
3.SUBADDRESS
4.RX PASSWORD
5.# OF RX COPIES
2.CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
Change all the mailbox settings done with the settings above.
Enter the number of the mailbox you want to change.
PASSWORD
Enter the password protecting the mailbox settings.
You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above
(1. SETUP FILE).
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
Delete a mailbox.
Enter the number of the mailbox you want to delete.
Enter the password protecting the mailbox you want to delete.
PASSWORD
2.RELAY TX GROUP
Set up relay box so your fax machine can relay document
transmissions to other fax machines in your area. (Q9-3)
1.SETUP FILE
Set up the relay box.
SET RLY TX GROUP#
Set a two-digit relay group number (00-99).
1.GROUP DIAL NAME
2.PASSWORD
3.SUBADDRESS
Give the relay group a name (length: 24 characters).
Assign a four-digit password to protect the relay box settings.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T subaddress.
4.RX PASSWORD
5.SELECT ORIG UNIT
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password.
Set your fax to check the incoming relay command to make sure the originator
is registered.
ON
TEL=
OFF
Receives and obeys incoming relay commands for registered originators only.
Use the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling buttons to register originators.
Receives and obeys all incoming relay commands.
Turns printing on/off for documents received for relay.
Prints a copy of every document relayed.
6.PRINT RX DOC.
ON
OFF
No copy is printed.
7.SELECT LOCATION
TEL=
8.TX REPORT
Use the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling buttons to select the fax numbers
to receive the document relayed from your fax machine.
Send a TX report from your fax machine (the relay unit) to the originator of
the transmission.
TRANSMIT
NOT TRANSMIT
9.TX START TIME
Transmits a document relay report to the originator.
No report is transmitted.
Set the fax machine to hold the document from the originator and then relay it
at a specified time. Use 24-hour setting. Up to 5 time settings are possible.
10.RELAY B’CAST
OFF
Turn relay broadcasting off temporarily without cancelling or changing all of
the relay box settings.
ON
In order for relay broadcasting to occur, this setting must be on.
2.CHANGE DATA
Change or add the settings on the relay box.
SET RLY GROUP TX#
PASSWORD
Enter the number of the relay box you want to change.
Enter the password protecting the relay box settings.
You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above
(1. SETUP FILE).
3.DELETE FILE
SET RLY TX GROUP#
PASSWORD
Delete a relay box and all settings.
Enter the number of the relay box you want to delete.
Enter the password of the relay box you want to delete.
16-18 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.MEMORY BOX
1.SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
Set up a general memory box to handle ITU-T subaddress and
password transactions. (Q8-13)
Create a general memory box and do all the general memory box
settings.
Give the general memory box a box number.
1.FILE NAME
2.PASSWORD
Give the memory box a name up to 24 characters long.
Assign a four-digit password to protect the memory box
settings.
3.SUBADDRESS
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T standard subaddress. You must
enter a subaddress in order to use the memory box features.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password.
4.TX PASSWORD
5.RX PASSWORD
6.RECEIVE
NO
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password.
Turn memory box receiving off.
Turn memory box receiving on.
YES
1.SELECT ORIG UNIT
Turn on checking to make sure the originator is registered on
your fax.
OFF
ON
Receive all documents, regardless of origin.
Receive documents from registered sources only.
Use the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling buttons to register
fax numbers from which you want the memory box to receive
documents.
TEL=
2.PRINT RX DOC.
Turn on printing of documents received in the memory box.
Documents received in the memory box are not printed.
Documents received in the memory box are printed.
Set the print method.
OFF
ON
1.PRINT METHOD
AUTO
MAN.
Print documents automatically as they are received.
Print documents manually.
2.# OF RX COPIES
Set the number of document copies to print.
Transmit documents from the memory box.
A document can not be transmitted from the memory box.
A document can be transmitted from the memory box.
Select fax telephone numbers to which to send documents from
the memory box. Use One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling
buttons to register the destinations.
7.TRANSMIT
NO
YES
1.SELECT LOCATIONS
TEL=
2.TX DOCUMENT
Transmit documents received in the memory box or scanned
into the memory box.
1.RECEIVED DOCUMENT
Transmit or do not transmit documents received in the memory
box.
TRANSMIT
Documents received in the memory box are to be transmitted.
Send a TX report to the originator for every document
received and transmitted from the memory box.
A transmission report is sent.
A transmission report is not sent.
Documents received in the memory box are not to be
transmitted.
TX REPORT
TRANSMIT
NOT TRANSMIT
NOT TRANSMIT
2.SCAN DOCUMENT
Transmit or do not transmit documents scanned into the
memory box.
TRANSMIT
NOT TRANSMIT
3.TX START TIME
Scanned documents can be transmitted.
Scanned documents can not be transmitted.
Set a time for transmission of documents from the memory
box.
EVERYDAY
Set the time using the 24-hour system. Up to 5 times can be
sent.
SELECT DAYS
Select a day. Up to 5 times can be set for each day.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.POLLING TX
For the memory box, turn polling sending on and off.
Memory box can not be used as a polling box.
Memory box can be used as a polling box.
Set how the document in the memory box is to be handled
after being polled and sent.
NO
YES
1.ERASE AFTER TX
ON
OFF
Document is erased after polling/sending.
Document remains in the memory box after polling/sending.
Transmit documents received in the memory box or scanned
into the memory box for polling and receiving.
Set documents received in the memory box for sending after
polling.
2.TX DOCUMENT
1.RECEIVED DOCUMENT
TRANSMIT
Documents received in the memory box from other faxes can
be transmitted.
NOT TRANSMIT
Documents received in the memory box from other faxes can
not be transmitted.
2.SCAN DOCUMENT
Set documents scanned into the memory box for sending after
polling.
TRANSMIT
NOT TRANSMIT
Documents scanned into the memory box can be transmitted.
Documents scanned into the memory box can not be
transmitted.
2.CHANGE DATA
Change settings for the memory box or add settings you did not
do when you created the memory box.
SET BOX #
Enter the number of the box you want to change.
Enter the password protecting the memory box settings.
You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above.
Delete the general memory box.
PASSWORD
3.DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
Enter the box number of the memory box you want to delete.
PASSWORD
Enter the password protecting the memory box that you want to
delete.
4.PRESET POLLING
1.SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
Set up preset polling/receiving setting. (Q11-5)
Set up a setting to poll at preset time.
Create a two-digit preset polling box.
1.FILE NAME
2.PASSWORD
3.SELECT LOCATIONS
Enter the name of the file (24 characters).
Enter a four-digit password to protect the polling settings.
Select the numbers of the fax units you want to poll. Use the
One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling buttons to enter the
numbers of the fax machine that you want to poll.
Set the time(s) that you want to start polling.
Set up to 5 times for every day.
TEL=
4.START TIME
EVERY DAY
SELECT DAYS
Set up to 5 times for each day selected.
16-20 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
Change the settings for preset polling/receiving.
Enter the number of the box you want to change.
PASSWORD
Enter the password protecting the preset polling settings. You can
now change any of the settings listed in the table above (1.
SETUP FILE).
3.DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
Delete the setting to poll at preset time.
Set the box number for the box you want to delete.
Enter the password of the file you want to delete.
PASSWORD
5.POLLING BOX
Set up a polling box to store a document in your fax machine
until your fax machine is polled to send the document. (Q11-17)
1.SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
Set up a polling box to hold a document until it is polled by and
sent to another fax machine.
Set a box number for the polling box.
1.FILE NAME
2.PASSWORD
3.SUBADDRESS
4.TX PASSWORD
5.ERASE AFTER TX
ON
Enter a file name (24 characters).
Enter a password to protect the polling box settings.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) standard ITU-T subaddress.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) standard ITU-T password.
Tell the fax machine how to handle the document after it is polled and sent.
Document is erased from the memory after it is polled and sent.
Document is not erased and remains in the memory after it is polled and sent.
OFF
2.CHANGE DATA
Change the settings on the polling box. You can now change any
of the settings listed in the table above (1. SETUP FILE).
SET BOX #
Set a box number you want to change.
PASSWORD
Enter the password of the polling box you want to change. You
can now change any of the settings listed in the table above (1.
SETUP FILE).
3.DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
Delete the polling box file.
Set the box number for the box you want to delete.
Enter the password of the polling box file you want to delete.
PASSWORD
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.TRANSFER
1.SETUP FILE
Set the fax unit to transfer the documents it receives to other
faxes. (Q7-11)
Create a file to receive and transfer documents.
1.FILE NAME
2.SELECT LOCATIONS
TEL=
Enter a file name (24 characters).
Select the numbers of the fax machines where you want documents transferred.
Use the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling buttons to enter the numbers of
the fax machines where you want documents transferred.
Enter a four-digit password to protect the transfer file settings.
Select the telephone numbers of the fax machines you want have received and
transferred.
3.PASSWORD
4.SELECT ORIG UNIT
OFF
ON
All fax transmissions are received and transferred.
The fax machine receives and transfers transmissions only from fax units that
you designate by fax telephone number.
TEL=
Use the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling buttons to designate originator
fax machines for receive and transfer.
5.TIME SETUP
1.START TIME
EVERY DAY
Set a time period wherein documents are to be received and transferred.
Set a specified time to start transfer operation.
Set up to 5 times every day.
SELECT DAYS
Select one or several days for document transfer. You can set 5 times for any
day(s) you select.
2.END TIME
EVERY DAY
SELECT DAYS
Set a specified time to end transfer operation.
Set up to 5 times every day.
Select one or several days for document transfer. You can set 5 times for any
day(s) you select.
6.PRINT RX DOC.
Set the fax machine that transfers the document to print a copy of the
transferred document.
OFF
ON
Received and transferred documents are not printed.
A copy of every document received and transferred is printed.
# OF RX COPIES Set the number of document copies to print.
2.CHANGE DATA
Change the transfer settings.
PASSWORD
Enter the four-digit password protecting the transfer settings. You
can now change any of the settings listed in the table above (1.
SETUP FILE).
3.DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
Delete the transfer settings file.
Enter the four-digit password of the transfer file you want to
delete.
16-22 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
1. Open both One-touch Speed Dialling panels. Then press DATA
REGISTRATION.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
DATA REGISTRATION
SET
2. Press SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
3. Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SET
4. Press SET.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
5. Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
Default settings are in bold.
PASSWORD
Enter the system password protecting the System Settings. (You will
not have to do this if the System Settings are not yet password
protected.) (Q13-2)
1.PASSWORD
Enter a four-digit password to protect the System Settings.
2.RESTRICTIVE CODES
Set restrictions for sending and printing with department access
codes and user access codes. (Q13-5)
1.TX SETTINGS
Restrict sending with department and user access codes.
OFF
Turn off restrictions on sending. This turns the feature
off without cancelling the department access codes and
passwords.
ON
DAC SETUP
ON
Set a DAC (department access
code).
Turn on department access codes.
ENTER DAC
01:
Press the search buttons to select a
number (01 to 99), then enter a four-
digit department access code.
DAC PASSWORD
Enter a four-digit password for the
department access password.
OFF
Turn off restrictions by department
access codes and passwords but turn
on restrictions by user access code.
USER ACCESS CODE
A four-digit number you set to
restrict sending.
2.PRINTER SETTINGS
Restricts document printing and copying with a four-digit access
code.
OFF
ON
USER ACCESS CODE
A four-digit number you set to
restrict printing and copying.
3.TEL SETTING
Allows you to restrict use of the telephone for voice communication.
OFF
ON
16-24 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.MEMORY LOCK RX
Turn forced memory receiving on and off. (Q13-15)
OFF
ON
1.MEM. LOCK
PASSWORD
Enter a four-digit password.
2.REPORT
Set reports to print (or not print) when
the forced memory receiving feature is
on.
OUTPUT NO
OUTPUT YES
3.TIME SETUP
Reports are not printed when the
forced memory receiving feature is on.
Reports are printed when the forced
memory receiving feature is on.
Set a time to turn on forced memory
receiving.
OFF
ON
1.START TIME
Turn on memory receiving at a specified
time.
EVERY DAY
Set up to 5 times for every day.
SELECT DAYS
Set up to 5 times for each selected day
of the week.
2.END TIME
Turn off memory receiving at specified
time.
EVERY DAY
Set up to 5 times for every day.
SELECT DAYS
Set up to 5 times for each selected day
of the week.
4.RX RESTRICTION
Turn off junk mail. (Q13-14)
OFF
Anyone can dial your fax and send a document.
ON
Another party can dial your fax and send a document only if their
number is registered on your fax for a One-touch or Coded Speed
Dialling button.
5.DATE SETUP
Set the format for the date display in the LCD or your fax machine.
MM/DD/YY
DD/MM ’YY
‘YY MM/DD
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Select a language for prompts, messages, menus and printed reports.
The number of languages available may be different depending on
where you purchased your fax machine.
ENGLISH, FRENCH, SPANISH, GERMAN, DUTCH,
ITALIAN, SLOVENE, SWEDISH, FINNISH,
PORTUGUISE, DANISH, NORWEGIAN
7.TX START SPEED
8.RX START SPEED
9.RX PASSWORD
Set the transmission speed for all documents you send.
Available settings: 14400, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps
Set the transmission speed for all documents you receive.
Available settings: 14400, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps
Set an RX password to match the ITU-T password of all incoming
document transmissions.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password. To receive a document, this
RX password must match the ITU-T password of the incoming
document.
After the RX password has been set, all incoming documents must
have a matching ITU-T password.
-or-
The document will be received regardless of this setting if the
incoming document has a matching subaddress and password for a
memory box.
10.ENERGY SAVER
Set the fax machine to reduce power consumption when not in use.
(Q3-19)
OFF
Fax machine does not power down even when it is idle.
ON
The fax machine reduces power consumption after it has remained
idle for a specified length of time.
ENERGY SVR TIME
Set the idle time to elapse and trigger
reduced power consumption. (03 to 30
min.) Default is 03 min.
11.PHONE NO. CHECK
Allows you to prevent sending a document to an unwanted
destination. The number you dial is checked with connected number
and if they match, then the document is sent.
OFF
The number is not checked.
ON
The fax uses the last six digits of the number you dial to match with
the last six digits of the other party’s number registered on the
remote fax. If the numbers match the document is sent. Otherwise,
the document is not sent.
16-26 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relationship between BATCH TX, QUICK ON-
LINE TX, and Timer Settings
BATCH TX
QUICK ON-
LINE TX
TIMER SET WITH SPEED DIALLING BUTTONS
YES
NO
ON
ON
Documents go into memory and are
grouped. Group is sent at the specified
time.
If the line is available, documents are not
grouped and are sent immediately.
If the line is busy, documents go into
memory, are grouped, then are sent
when the line becomes available.
ON
OFF
ON
Documents go into memory and are
grouped. The group is sent at the
specified time.
Documents go into memory, are grouped
and then are sent when the line becomes
available.
OFF
Documents go into memory, but are not If the line is available, documents are not
grouped. Each document is sent at the
specified time.
grouped and are sent immediately. If the
line is busy, documents go into memory,
are not grouped, and are sent when the
line becomes available.
OFF
OFF
Documents go into memory, but are not Documents go into memory, are not
grouped. Each document is sent at the
specified time.
grouped and are sent when the line
becomes available.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16-28 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Specifications
General
Sheet size:
Max. width 279 mm
Min. width 148 mm
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) Capacity:
50 A4 or letter size pages
Effective scanning image size:
Recording paper size:
Width (A4) 208 mm
Width (letter, legal) 216 mm
(A4) 210 mm
Paper Cassette Capacity:
Side paper cassette:
approximately 100 sheets (letter, legal,
A4)
Upper front paper cassette
approximately 500 sheets (A4)
Lower front paper cassette
approximately 500 sheets (A4)
(optional)
Compatibility:
Modem speed:
Memory:
G3
14.4/12/9.6/7.2/4.8/2.4 Kbps
1.25 MB (80 pages* approx.)
Upgrade Option
plus 2 MB (additional 128 pages* approx.)
= total 208 pages* approx.
plus 4 MB(additional 256 pages* approx.)
= total 336 pages* approx.
plus 6 MB(additional 384 pages* approx.)
= total 464 pages* approx.
plus 8 MB(additional 512 pages* approx.)
= total 592 pages* approx.
Appendix A
Specifications
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display):
Data compression system:
Transmission time:
20 x 2
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG**
G3 Mode
ECM-JBIG
Approx. 5 sec./pg.*
ECM-MMR
Approx. 6 sec./pg.*
MR Standard mode
Approx. 12 sec./pg.*
MH Standard mode
Approx. 15 sec./pg.*
Scanning line density:
G3 Mode
Standard:
8 dots/mm x 3.85 lines/mm
Fine:
8 dots/mm x 7.7 lines/mm
Super Fine:
8 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm
Ultra Fine:
16 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm
(interpolated)
Toner cartridge:
Canon FX4 Toner Cartridge
Operation
Fax printing speed:
Approx. 8 pp./min.
Scanning method:
Solid state electronic scanning by contact
image sensor
Recording (printing) method:
Print resolution:
Laser beam electronic circuit
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Applicable lines:
Subscribers telephone circuit (PSTN)
A-2
Specifications
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dial Features
One-touch Speed Dialling (Registration for
72 numbers)
Coded Speed Dialling (Registration for 128
numbers)
Group Dialling
On-hook dialling
Manual dialling with 10-button keypad
Automatic re-dialling
Manual re-dialling
Program dialling
Dial search
Networking Features
Transmitting:
Sequential broadcast
Batch transmission
Confidential transmission
Relay broadcasting
Password/subaddress sending
Polling transmission
Error re-transmission
Delayed transmission
Receiving:
Memory lock reception
Polling reception
Timer polling
Confidential mailbox
Relay broadcasting
Transfer
Received image reduction
Collating
Copier Features
Scanning resolution:
400 dpi x 600 dpi
(Direct Copy/Interpolated),
16 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm
(Memory Copy/Interpolated)
Appendix A
Specifications
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing resolution:
Copy speed:
600 x 600 dpi
First copy time Approx. 25 sec.*
(from front upper paper cassette)
Multi copy speed Approx. 8 cpm*
Multiple copy:
Up to 99 pages
Telephone Features
Optional telephone handset
Extension phone hookup
Remote reception by extension phone
TONE button
PAUSE button
R button
D.T. button
Power
Power source:
200 – 240 V/50 – 60 Hz
12 hours
Battery backup:
Power consumption:
Standby
approx. 11 W at 25gC
Operation
approx. 380 W (100% of document black
copy)
Energy standby
approx. 2 W
Operating Environment
Temperature:
10gC to 32.5gC
Humidity:
20 – 80% RH
Weight
Approx. 20 kg
Approx. 26.5 kg (with optional cassette)
A-4
Specifications
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dimensions
406 mm w x 460 mm d x 388 mm h
(both with and without handset)
406 mm w x 460 mm d x 475 mm h
(both with and without handset and with
optional cassette)
*
Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No.1 (Standard Mode).
** JBIG is a new ITU-T standard image data compression method. JBIG’s compression method allows data to be compressed
more efficiently than MMR, a convential compression method. JBIG is especially effective when transmitting halftone image
documents. Because the smaller data size requires less transmission time, JBIG saves you time and money.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
AppendixA
Specifications
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-6
Specifications
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Documents You Can Scan
Follow these guidelines if you need exact information about the dimensions of
documents you can scan.
Document Media to Avoid
Avoid trying to scan wrinkled or creased paper, carbon or carbon back paper,
curled paper, coated paper, torn paper, onion skin or other very thin paper.
Specifications for Paper Documents You Can Scan
Quality
Use plain bond, typewriter quality without curl, folds, or
rough edges.
Weight
60 g/m2 to 82.5 g/m2
0.08 to 0.13 mm
18gC to 24gC
Thickness
Storage
50% to 60% RH
Document Thickness
The thickness of documents that you feed into the fax should be within the range
0.06-0.13 mm. If you have to feed a thick document, first make a copy of the
document on a copy machine and then send the copy.
Appendix B
Documents You Can Scan
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document Size
Make sure the documents you feed into the fax are within the dimensions shown
below. For documents that are larger or smaller than these recommended limits,
reduce them or enlarge them on a copy machine and then send the copy.
Maximum Document Size
Minimum Document Size
279mm
148mm
105mm
1 meter
Scanning Area on the Document
The shaded areas in the illustration below show the parts of the document page
that are not scanned by the fax. Before you send a document, make sure the
document margins are wider than the margins shown below
max. 4mm
A4
max. 4mm
max. 4mm
max. 4.5mm
B-2
Documents You Can Scan
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Area
Note that the fax unit can not print completely from the edge of one border to
another. The size of the margin differs slightly with the paper size.
max. 4mm
max. A4 or letter 13.5mm
max. legal 13.9mm
max. 4.5mm
max. 6.5mm
Appendix B
Documents You Can Scan
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-4
Documents You Can Scan
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
A
Activity report
Journal of transactions, both sent and received.
ADF
Stands for automatic document feeder. The ADF can hold 50 sheets of A4-size
paper. You load a document once, and the fax then feeds each sheet of the
document one by one.
Automatic dialling
Dialling fax or telephone numbers by pressing one or four buttons. To use
automatic dialling, you must register the numbers in the fax unit’s memory. See
also One-touch Speed Dialling, Coded Speed Dialling, and Group Dialling.
Automatic redialling
When the other fax is busy or does not answer, or when an error occurs when
sending, the fax waits 2 minutes and then automatically re-dials the same number.
If there is still no answer, it makes 1 more attempt after waiting for 2 minutes.
After the last unsuccessful attempt, the fax prints an activity report.
Automatic reduction of received image
At the top of the received document, the date, time, company name, and fax
number can be printed. Because this extra information at the top of the received
document requires additional space, the number of pages of the received
document may increase. Automatic reduction of the received image avoids this by
reducing the size of the printed image.
B
Batch sending
When several documents are scanned into the memory to be sent to the same
destination at a specified time, the documents are sent together in the same
transmission one after the other.
bps
Stands for bits per second.
Broadcasting
Transmitting a document to more than one location.
Glossary
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C
CCITT/ITU-T
Formally known as CCITT, Consultative Committee for International Telegraph
and Telephone. CCITT has been replaced by the International
Telecommunications Unit-Telecommunications Sector (ITU-T), a committee
created to set international standards for telecommunications.
Coded Speed Dialling
Allows you to automatically dial a facsimile number by pressing only four
buttons, CODED DIAL and a three-digit code. You can register up to 128
facsimile numbers for Coded Speed Dialling. When you register the facsimile
number, you can also enter the receiving party’s name, set the speed for the
transmission, and other useful features.
Confidential mailbox
Two-digit numbers between 00 and 99. If the number is a single digit, precede it
with a zero. The fax can have up to 70 confidential mailboxes for individual users.
Confidential mailbox password
Confidential mailbox passwords are four-digit decimal numbers between 0000 to
9999. To print a confidential document received in the memory, you must enter
your confidential mailbox password. Remember your password. You will need it
to print confidential documents received in the memory. Later if you want to
change your password, you must first enter the current password before you are
allowed to complete the procedure.
Confidential receiving
To receive a confidential document you must first create a mailbox and register
your confidential mailbox password. You use the password to print out
confidential documents that you receive in the memory. Confidential mailbox
passwords are four-digit decimal numbers between 0000 to 9999. When you
receive a confidential document in your mailbox, the fax prints a Confidential RX
Report.
Confidential sending
To use confidential sending, there are two ways. One is to first register the
procedure with a One-touch Speed Dialling button. After you register the
procedure, all you have to do is feed the document into the fax and press the
button. The other is to press CONFIDENTIAL MAILBOX button and dial.
D
Default
The fax is programmed in the factory with settings that we recommend. These
are known as factory default settings. You can customize your fax by
programming settings other than the factory default settings. For details, see
Chapter 16 of this User’s Guide.
G-2
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed transmission
With delayed transmission (also called timer sending), you can set a time for the
document to be sent. You do not have to be in the office when the document is
sent at the specified time. With delayed transmission you can send the same
document to more than one destination at a preset time. If you frequently send
the same document to several destinations, you can save time by using Group
Dialling.
Density control
You can darken or lighten documents that you send or receive with buttons at the
top of the operation panel.
Destination label
Attachable label used to label speed dialling buttons on the facsimile machine.
Write the name of the other party on the label and then paste the label above the
button where his or her fax number is registered.
Dialling methods
Dialling numbers at the press of one or a few buttons. To use automatic dialling,
you must register the fax numbers in the memory of the machine.
½
½
½
½
½
Regular dialling
One-touch Speed Dialling
Coded Speed Dialling
Group Dialling
Directory Dialling
Direct sending
Use direct sending if the memory is full but you still want to send a document.
Direct sending scans and sends one page at a time. The document is not scanned
into the memory, so it takes a little more time to get your original document
back.
Document
The single sheet or stack of papers containing the data you want to send through
or receive from a fax machine.
Document density
The document density settings alter the lightness or darkness of the documents
sent or received. See density control.
Document guides
Guide the document into the fax for scanning, copying, or sending.
Document memory list
The memory list shows what documents are currently stored in the fax memory.
Each memory list shows:
½
½
½
Transaction number for each document
How each document was stored
Name and number the fax was sent to if they are registered for One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialling.
½
½
Number of pages in the document.
Date and time each document was stored in the memory and when it will be
sent.
½
½
Sender’s name (TTI)
Errors (if any) that occurred when sending the document.
Glossary
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document tray
Holds documents ejected from the fax unit after they have been scanned into
memory, copied, or sent by direct sending.
Dual access
Enables you to scan a transmission, even if the fax is copying, sending or
receiving a document. You do not have to wait until the fax finishes the current
send/receive transmission. While the facsimile sends a document from the
memory, you can load other documents into the memory, copy documents, print
out reports, or register information.
E
ECM
Stands for error correction mode. Reduces system and line errors when sending
or receiving from another fax with ECM capability. When there is noise on the
telephone line, a distortion or blank area can occur in the document received by
the other party. ECM divides one page into a number of blocks and checks for
lost data block by block. When some data is lost in a certain block, ECM repeats
transmission from the beginning of that block after confirming that all data within
the block can be transmitted successfully. In this way, ECM guarantees that a
good image can be received at the receiving end. ECM is very effective in
countries where the telephone lines are in poor condition. There may be
occasions when you want to turn ECM off. For instance, when you feel the
transaction speed is extremely slow, you can turn ECM off.
F
FINE
Use this setting for documents with very small characters and lines. It is twice the
STANDARD resolution.
G
G3
Group 3 fax machines defined by CCITT. Uses encoding schemes to transmit
image data while reducing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted, thus
reducing transmission time. G3 fax machines can transmit one page in less than
one minute. Encoding schemes for G3 fax machines are Modified Huffman
(MH), Modified Read (MR), Modified Modified Read (MMR), and JBIG.
G-4
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Group dial
Group Dialling allows you to dial up to 199 previously registered One-touch
Speed Dialling or Coded Speed Dialling numbers together as a group. This
means you only need to press a One-touch speed dial button or the CODED
DIAL button followed by a three-digit code to dial a large group of numbers
automatically. You register each group of facsimile numbers for a One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialling button, so make sure a button is available before trying to
register Group Dialling. Once a group is defined, you can add or delete numbers
to/from the group.
Group number
List of all facsimiles to receive a relayed document. These are two-digit codes
between 00-99. The group number is registered on the facsimile with the relay
feature.
I
IN USE lamp
Lights when the telephone line is in use.
J
Jack
The telephone line receptacles on your wall and on the side of your fax unit used
to connect your fax machine to the telephone line and handset or extension
phone.
L
Long distance dialling
When dialling or registering long-distance numbers, you sometimes have to insert
a pause either within or after the telephone number. The destination and length
of the pause differ depending on the system. Contact your local authorized
Canon dealer or your local telephone company for further information if you
experience problems with long distance dialling.
M
Manual receiving
Use this setting if you have installed the optional handset kit and there is only
one line connected to your office which you use for both phone and fax
communication, and you want to monitor all incoming calls yourself. When you
hear the ringer, pick up the handset and answer the phone. If you hear a slow
beep, this means someone is trying to send you a facsimile transmission. Press
START/SCAN and hang up the handset to start receiving the document. You can
not receive documents if there is another document fed into the fax.
Glossary
G-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual redialling
When you use regular dialling, you can redial a number manually simply by
pressing REDIAL on the operation panel. The last number called is the number
re-dialled.
Manual sending
Use manual sending when you have installed the optional handset kit or
connected an extension phone and you have to talk to the other party before you
send the document. You may have to do this to send transmissions to older fax
units. Put the document in the fax and then dial the number. After the call
connects, if you hear a high-pitched tone, press START/SCAN to send the
facsimile and then hang up. If the other party or the other fax does not answer,
hang up the handset. If the other party answers, tell him that you are going to
send a facsimile transmission and that he should press start button on his own
machine. Press START/SCAN on your own fax, then hang up the handset.
Memory box
The memory box provides features that allow you to set up an ITU-T subaddress
and password and allows you to use advanced features such as confidential
sending and relay sending with fax units of any manufacture as long as they too
support ITU-T standard subaddress/password transactions.
Memory broadcast
Allows you to send one scanned document to a maximum of 210 destinations
with One-touch Dialling, Coded Speed Dialling, and regular dialling. Just dial the
numbers sequentially when you send a document. If you must do this frequently,
register the numbers for Group Dialling.
Memory file
A document stored in the memory is also called a memory file.
Memory list
See document memory list.
Memory lock
Usually a document is printed as soon as it is received, but the memory lock
feature forces all documents to be received in memory until you enter a password
to print them. This feature prevents printed documents from piling up on the
paper output tray when the office is unattended. After you return to the office,
you can print all documents stored in the memory.
Memory reception password
Protects all documents received and stored in the memory when the memory
reception feature is turned on. The memory reception password is a four-digit
number (0000-9999) that you should safeguard to prevent access to your
documents stored in the fax memory. This password unlocks the memory to print
all documents received with memory lock turned on. See memory lock.
G-6
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory sending
Scanning the document into the memory before the facsimile dials the number
and sends it. Scanning is fast and you only have to wait until the original
document is scanned, not until it is sent. You can get the original back much
faster and spend less time standing around the fax.
Multitransaction
Also called, multiple transmission or sequential broadcast, this term refers to
scanning a document once and sending it to more than one location. You can
send a single document to a maximum of 210 destinations.
N
Noise
A general term applied to a number of problems that adversely affect the
operation of telephone lines used for modem and fax communication.
Normal mode
Using the fax with its default settings.
Numeric buttons
The numeric buttons are the round buttons on the operation panel marked the
same as a standard telephone keypad. Press to perform regular dialling. The
numeric buttons are also used to enter numbers and letters when registering
numbers and names.
O
One-touch Speed Dialling
Each One-touch Speed Dialling button holds a facsimile telephone number.
After the numbers are registered, all you have to do is press one button to dial.
Up to 72 numbers can be registered for One-touch Speed Dialling.
P
PAUSE
By pressing PAUSE, you can enter a pause between digits of a telephone number
when you register the number for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialling or during
regular dialling. A pause may be required for a connection to an outside line, or
some countries may require a pause for overseas fax transmission.
Glossary
G-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pause time
When registering long-distance numbers, you sometimes have to insert a pause
either within or after the number. The destination of the pause and pause time
depend on the system. Pauses entered within a number are 2 seconds long, and a
pause at the end of a number is 10 seconds. A pause is inserted in a number or at
the end of a number by pressing the PAUSE button. The PAUSE button is
factory preset to enter a 2 second pause within a number, although this may
differ according to your location. Pauses entered after a number are always fixed
at 10 seconds. If you adjust the pause time, this only changes the length of the
pauses inserted within numbers and does not affect pauses entered at the end of
numbers.
PBX
Stands for private branch exchange. A PBX controls the flow of telephone traffic
through the institution itself, including automatic call back and dialling and
paging systems. See switchboard.
Polling transmission
Polling means one facsimile unit requests another to send a document. This is
useful when the sending party, the party with the original document, is not in the
office, but the document must be sent out. The receiving party dials the fax
holding the original and requests that it be sent. In other words, the receiver
always polls the sender. Before using the polling feature, you have to set up
polling boxes.
Printable area
The area of the document that can actually be reproduced and printed on the
recording paper by the receiving fax. The printing area is smaller than the paper.
Pulse
See rotary pulse.
R
Reduction mode
The fax unit’s automatic feature that slightly reduces the received image to allow
room at the top of the page for the sender’s ID information. You can also reduce
the size of large incoming documents using the RX REDUCTION option.
Registering
A process by which you place fax or telephone numbers and names in the fax
unit’s memory for automatic dialling so that you can save time dialling frequently
called destinations.
Regular dialling
Dialling a number with the numeric buttons. Use regular dialling to dial a
number that is not registered for any of the automatic dialling methods. Press
HOOK then use the numeric buttons to dial the number you want to call.
G-8
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay broadcast
See relay sending
Relay sending
Also called relay broadcast. You can send a document once to a fax in a distant
location and then have that fax relay your document to several other destinations
in the same area.
Remote receiving ID
The number you dial on an extension to start receiving a fax. The default remote
receiving ID is 25, so just dial 25 and then hang up the handset of the extension
telephone.
Remote reception
Allows you to receive a fax transmission with an extension telephone. To start
receiving a fax, dial the remote receiving ID (25). You can also set the fax to start
receiving by hanging up.
Reports
This is a list of reports printed by the facsimile:
½
Activity Management Report (TX or RX) You can set the fax to print a
report every time you send or receive a document. You can also set the fax to
print part of the document on the report to remind you of the content of the
document. To turn printing these activity reports on and off, use the user
settings.
½
Activity Report Provides a record of the last 40 sending and receiving
transactions. You can print out activity management reports manually
whenever you want to review the last 40 transactions, set the fax up to print
them automatically after every 40 transactions, print the report at the same
time every day, or print the report showing the sending transactions of
individuals or departments in your company, using department codes
registered on the fax, as well as a list of receptions.
½
Confidential RX Report After you receive a confidential document in a
mailbox, the fax prints out a confidential message notice. No special settings
are required. Each notice shows the date and time you received the
confidential document, the name and telephone number of the party sending
the confidential document, whether the document was successfully received,
and other useful information.
½
½
Error TX Report If the fax fails to send a document because the other party
does not answer, even after automatic redialling, or if an error occurs, then
your fax will immediately print an error transmission report. The report
includes the facsimile number of the other party so you can try sending again
and can print part of the first page of the document so you can identify it.
Memory Clear Report When documents are stored in the memory if power
to the fax is cut off for more than 12 hours, the documents stored in the
memory will be erased. After power is restored, a Memory Clear List will
print to show you what documents have been erased. If power is restored
within 12 hours, the documents are not erased and no report prints.
Glossary
G-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
½
½
Multi TX/RX Report When you send a document to more than one
destination, the fax prints a report to show you the name and numbers of the
other parties, whether the transactions were completed or not, and errors if
any. The fax automatically prints multi-transaction reports for sending
documents to more than one destination, delayed sending documents to more
than one destination, sending documents through a relay fax to more than
one destination, and sending confidential documents to more than one
destination if the mailboxes are the same on every fax unit.
Relay Broadcast Report After sending a document through a relay fax, you
may receive a relay broadcast report from the fax machine that relayed the
document. This shows whether or not the document was successfully relayed
to all the final destinations. To receive a report, the other machine must be
set to print a relay broadcast report.
Resolution
The density of dots for an output device like a fax, scanner, or printer. Expressed
in terms of dots per inch (dpi). Low resolution causes font characters and
graphics to have a jagged appearance. Higher resolution means smoother curves
and angles as well as a better match to traditional typeface designs. Resolution
values are represented by horizontal data and vertical data, for example, 600 x
600 dpi.
Restricted reception
The ability of the fax unit to restrict incoming documents. With this feature
turned on, the fax unit will receive documents only from speed dialling numbers
registered in your fax unit.
Rotary pulse
A rotary-pulse or pulse dial telephone is dialled by manually rotating a dial to
send pulses to the telephone switching system. When you pulse dial, you will hear
clicks. With tone dialling, you will hear tones.
RX password
The ITU-T password set on your fax to match the ITU-T password of all
incoming documents. If your RX password matches the ITU-T password of the
incoming transmission, the document is received. If the passwords do not match,
the document is not received. The maximum length of the password is 20 digits
and may consist of numbers, spaces, asterisk (*), and pound mark (#).
S
Scanning area
The scanning area is narrower than the original document size on the entire
border around the document. Documents you send should have some margin on
the sides and the top and bottom. Anything over this margin can not be scanned
for sending.
G-10
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sender’s name
Name or company name, your fax number, date and time the document sent to
the receiving party are printed on each page you send. The sender’s name, which
is your own name can be printed on the documents that you send. You can
register up to 99 sender names that can be selected with the TTI selector before
sending. Your name and facsimile number are printed at the top of documents
that you send.
Sending speed
The rate at which documents are sent over the phone line. See also bps.
Sequential broadcast
Allows you to send one scanned document to up to 210 destinations by using
One-touch Speed Dialling, Coded Speed Dialling, and regular dialling. You just
dial several numbers to send the document. If you do this frequently, you should
register the numbers for Group Dialling.
Smoothing
Even if the image you receive from the other party’s fax is of poor quality, your
fax unit will smooth the image to produce a better quality image.
Stamp
The optional stamp feature marks documents that have been scanned for
transmission with a yellow circle stamped on the lower left side of the document.
STANDARD
Use this setting to send normal, typewritten or printed documents containing
only text and no drawings, photographs, or illustrations.
Standby
On and ready to use. All operations start from the standby mode where the date
and time are displayed.
SUPER FINE
This button increases the clarity of documents you send. The lamp shows you the
current setting. It is four times the STANDARD resolution.
Switchboard
Also called a PBX (private branch exchange) internal switching system. You have
to dial an outside line number along with the regular facsimile telephone number.
The outside line number must also be registered. Depending on the system, you
may also have to insert a pause after the outside line number. The pause button
is factory preset to enter a 2-second pause. However, you can change the pause
time to suit your PBX or telephone system. Before adjusting the pause time,
check with your local authorized Canon dealer or your local telephone company
about the correct pause time to use for your telephone system.
Glossary
G-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T
Timed sending
See delayed transmission.
Tone/pulse setting
This setting allows you to set the fax to touch tone (T) or pulse (P) dialling,
depending on the type of phone line you have installed.
TONE
You can switch temporarily from pulse to tone dialling by pressing TONE/+
before dialling. Data services may require that you use tone dialling, so if you
have a conventional pulse dial telephone and need to use tone dial to access the
data service, press TONE/+ to tone dial on your pulse telephone line.
Toner cartridge
Your fax machine uses a patented FX4 cartridge which contains both the
photosensitive drum and toner in one compact unit. For details about disposing
of used toner cartridges, contact your local dealer or authorized Canon
representative.
Touch-tone
A touch-tone or tone dial telephone is dialled by pressing buttons that send tones
of varying pitch to the telephone switching system.
Transaction number
When a document is scanned into or received in the memory, it is assigned a
transaction number (TX/RX). You can select documents in the memory for
sending, printing, or deleting by specifying the transaction number.
Transfer
A special feature you can set up on the fax to have all documents received on the
main fax unit transferred to another fax unit. For example, you could have the
main fax unit in the office transfer all documents to your fax at home. You can set
the day and time for this feature to turn on and off. Please remember, however,
that documents received in a confidential mailbox or a memory box can not be
transferred. See transfer password.
Transfer password
Protects the transfer settings from unauthorized access. You must enter the
transfer password, a four-digit code (0000-9999), in order to view or change the
transfer settings.
Transmission time
A fax transmission consists of three stages: the pre-message handshake, the
message transmission, and the post- message handshake. The transmission time
described in this user’s guide is not the total time required for the entire
transmission. It is only the time for the message transmission. The transmission
time described in this user’s guide is the fastest time achieved when faxes
communicate in the same mode.
G-12
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TTI
Stands for transmit terminal identification. Also called sender information. The
TTI is the name of the person or organisation and the facsimile number of the
fax that sends a document. In addition to a unit name that you register for the
fax, you can create up to 99 sender names that can be selected and used in place
of the unit name when you send a facsimile transmission.
TTI SELECTOR
With this feature you can select the name to be printed at the top of the message
you send. Usually you register your company name as the TTI, but you can also
use personal names.
TX password
The ITU-T password set on your fax that accompanies the document you send
and must match the RX password on the fax where it is received. If your TX
password matches the RX password of the other party’s fax, the document is
received. If the passwords do not match, the document is not received. The
maximum length of the password is 20 digits and may consist of numbers, spaces,
asterisk (*), and pound mark (#).
U
UHQ
Stands for ultra high quality image. Allows you to send documents that are very
close to the quality of the original.
Urgent document
Use direct sending to send an urgent document ahead of documents in the
memory waiting to be sent. Just feed the urgent document into the facsimile and
dial, and press DIRECT TX. As soon as the facsimile finishes sending the current
document from the memory, it will send the urgent document. See also direct
sending.
Glossary
G-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G-14
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
Coded Speed Dialling
defined, 4-5
Activity Management Report
sample, 14-8
entering a name, 4-16
entering number, 4-15
Activity Management Report (TX/RX)
separate
registering for Group Dialling, 4-23
setting timer, 4-17
sample, 14-8
Activity Report (RX)
sample, 14-13
Activity Report (TX)
sample, 14-10
Activity Report (TX) with image
sample, 14-11
setting transmission speed, 4-20
setting up, 4-14
turning ECM on/off, 4-21
using, 4-28
confidential documents
cancelling mailbox, 10-6
creating mailbox, 10-2
receiving, 10-7
Activity Reports
printing, 14-7
sending, 10-9
automatic document feeder (ADF)
load limit, 6-4
setting document for copying, 5-2
setting document for sending, 6-3
automatic redialling
described, 6-16
sending with speed dialling, 10-9
confidential mailbox
changing mailbox settings, 10-5
setting, 16-17
confidential Mailbox List
sample, 14-15
confidential Receive Report
CONFID. RX REPORT, 16-8
sample, 14-13
B
CONTRAST
batch sending
setting for sending, 6-5
settings for copying, 5-5
copying
function, 4-9, 4-17, 4-25, 16-10
checking document, 5-2
contrast, 5-5
document, 5-2
C
CHECK PRINTER COVER
displayed at power on, 2-28
cleaning
document settings, 5-4
document type, 5-5
procedure, 5-5
fax unit, 15-18
resolution, 5-5
Opening operation panel, 15-19
scanning area, 15-22
closed network
setting document, 5-3
with restrictions on, 13-11
creating, 13-14
Coded Speed Dial List
sample, 14-3, 14-4
D
D.T. button
confirming dial tone, 4-4
PROGRAM button, 12-5
Index
I-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
data registration
entering a name, 3-7
entering text/numbers, 3-7
menu, 16-2
sender information, 3-11
date
deleting with DELETE FILE button, 8-9
deleting with MEMORY REFERENCE
button, 8-9
erasing from memory, 8-8
jam, 15-2
receiving large size, 16-15
removing document jams, 15-2
scanning for polling sending, 11-17
SELECT CASSETTE, 16-15
setting for copying, 5-3
setting for sending, 6-2
settings for copying, 5-4
document tray
format, 16-25
registering, 3-13
setting, 16-4
date and time
registering, 3-13
DATE SETUP
format setting, 16-25
defaults
attaching, 2-20
defined, 2-2
DOCUMENT TYPE
listed, 12-10
delayed sending
setting for sending, 6-5
settings for copying, 5-5
setting, 6-21
setting timer, 6-21
density
E
control, 16-5
SELECT DENSITY, 16-16
Department Access Code Report
sample, 14-9
ECM
turning on/off for Coded Speed
Dialling, 4-21
dial tone
turning on/off for One-touch Speed
Dialling, 4-13
confirming, 4-4
registering number for, 4-4
dialling
ENERGY SAVER
setting, 16-26
Coded Speed Dialling, 4-14, 4-28
directory dialling, 4-31
entering pauses, 4-2
Group Dialling, 4-22, 4-29, 4-31
long distance, 6-9
One-touch Speed Dialling, 4-6, 4-26
regular dialling, 6-7
speed dialling, 4-5, 4-26
speed dialling methods, 4-5
tone dialling on pulse line, 12-3
direct sending
ENERGY SAVER button
using, 3-21
energy saver mode
ENERGY SAVER button, 3-21
returning to full power, 3-21
turning on, 3-19
using, 3-19
entry mode
changing, 3-7
LCD display, 3-7
number, 3-8
described, 6-13
text, 3-8
procedure, 6-14
error messages
directory dialling
using, 4-31
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
setting, 16-26
listed alphabetically, 15-26
listed by number, 15-24
Error Report (RX)
sample, 14-12
document
Error Report (TX)
sample, 14-9
extension phone
connecting, 2-22
receiving with, 7-7
check before loading for sending, 6-2
copying, 5-2
defined, 2-2
I-2
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
I
fax unit
ITU-T password
assembling, 2-17
front view, 2-11
lifting, 2-8
parts, 2-11
rear view, 2-12
memory box, 8-10
sending document, 6-24
ITU-T subaddress
memory box, 8-10
sending document, 6-24
FILE SETTINGS
CONFID. MAILBOX, 16-17
described, 16-3
J
listed, 16-17
MEMORY BOX, 16-18
POLLING BOX, 16-21
PRESET POLLING, 16-20
RELAY TX GROUP, 16-18
TRANSFER, 16-22
front paper cassette
inserting in fax unit, 2-26
loading, 2-25
jam
document feed, 15-2
printer feed, 15-3
L
language
removing lock plate, 2-15
switching, 16-26
location
choosing, 2-3
G
ideal temperature, 2-3
space around fax unit, 2-5
long distance
Group Dial List
sample, 14-4
Group Dialling
setting for Coded Speed Dialling, 4-20
setting for One-touch Speed dialling, 4-12
defined, 4-5
registering for Coded Speed Dialling
button, 4-23, 4-24
registering for One-touch Speed Dialling
button, 4-23
M
manual receiving
setting timer, 4-24
setting up, 4-22
manual/auto switching, 16-12
procedure, 7-6
using, 4-29
setting auto switch time, 7-4
settings, 7-6
manual sending
H
described, 6-15
procedure, 6-15
handset (option)
memory
connecting, 2-20
required for manual receiving, 7-6
using, 12-2
creating memory box, 8-10
deleting document, 8-9
erasing document, 8-8
using for sending, 6-10
using with restrictions on, 13-12
view, 2-12
erasing document in memory, 6-17
locking to receive all documents, 13-15
power failure, 8-24
printing document in memory, 8-5
printing memory list, 8-4
re-sending document in memory, 6-17
re-sending to different destination, 8-7
re-sending to same destination, 8-6
sending with memory full, 6-14
Index
I-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
memory box
cancelling, 8-21
O
changing settings, 8-19
creating, 8-10, 8-11, 8-13
ITU-T subaddress/password, 8-10
preparation for setting up, 8-11
printing document from, 8-23
sending document, 8-22
setting, 16-18
One-Touch Speed Dial List 1
sample, 14-3
One-touch Speed Dialling
defined, 4-5
registering for Group Dialling, 4-23
setting for long distance, 4-12
setting time, 4-9
setup summary, 8-15
Memory Box Report
sample, 14-14
Memory Clear Report
sample, 14-17
setting transmission speed, 4-12
setting up, 4-6
turning ECM on/off, 4-13
using, 4-26
One-Touch Speed Dialling List 2
sample, 14-4
memory list
printing, 8-4
Operation panel
memory lock
buttons, 3-2, 3-4
described, 13-15
Opening, 15-19
MEMORY LOCK RX, 16-25
setting password, 13-15
setting time, 13-15
summary settings, 13-17
turning on, 13-18
using, 3-5
Output tray
attaching, 2-20
MEMORY LOCK RX
setting, 16-25
P
memory sending
paper
described, 6-11
loading, 2-22
procedure, 6-11
menu
loading front paper cassette, 2-25
storing, 15-13
button summary, 3-8
defined, 2-2
paper jams
avoiding, 2-8
Opening, 3-6
pauses
returning to previous level, 3-6
using, 3-5
mode
changing entry mode, 3-7
Multi-transaction Report
sample, 14-12
adjusting length, 4-3
entering for dialling, 4-2
MID PAUSE SET, 16-9
PHONE NO. CHECK
setting, 16-26
polling
before polling receiving, 11-2
before polling to send, 11-13
cancelling polling box setup, 11-20
cancelling preset polling, 11-12
changing polling box setup, 11-19
changing preset settings, 11-11
creating polling box, 11-13
described, 11-2
N
numeric keypad buttons
entering text/numbers, 3-7
summary, 3-8
preset, 11-5
scanning document for sending, 11-17
sending, 11-13
timer, 11-5
to receive, 11-3
to receive at set time, 11-5
I-4
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POLLING BOX
R
setting, 16-21
power
R button
backup battery, 8-25
connection, 2-6
failure and memory, 8-24
required, 2-6
See “R-KEY”, 4-2
R-KEY
USER SETTINGS, 16-6
R-KEY (R-KEY)
function, 4-2
See “RX REPORT”, 16-7
RECEIVED IN MEMORY
message, 8-2
turning on power, 2-27
PRESET POLLING
setting, 16-20
PRINT REPORT
PROGRAM button, 12-5
printer cover
Received Memory Box List
sample, 14-16
closing, 2-19
receiving
PRINTER SETTINGS
# OF RX COPIES, 16-15
described, 16-3
all documents in memory, 13-15
auto switch time, 7-4
automatically, 7-2
cancelling, 7-10
listed, 16-14
PRINT IN ORDER, 16-16
RX REDUCTION, 16-15
SELECT CASSETTE, 16-15
SELECT DENSITY, 16-16
TONER SUPPLY, 16-16
printing
confidential documents, 10-7
manually, 7-6
memory receiving, 16-13
MEMORY RX, 16-13
messages, 7-2
password, 16-26
Activity Reports, 14-7
document in memory, 8-5
document in memory box, 8-23
documents locked in memory, 13-18
lists, 14-1
polling, 11-3
remote, 7-7
REMOTE RECEIVING, 16-13
RX REDUCTION, 16-15
setting receive mode, 7-2
start speed, 16-26
transferring documents, 7-11
recording paper
memory list, 8-4
paper supply source for reports, 16-8
PRINT IN ORDER, 16-16
removing jams, 15-3
report, 16-5
see “paper”, 2-22
storing, 15-13
reports, 14-1
redial
reports with restrictions on, 13-11
sender names, 14-6
TONER SUPPLY low, 16-16
User Data List, 14-5
PROGRAM button
D.T. function, 12-5
AUTO REDIAL, 16-10
redialling
automatic, 6-16
cancelling, 6-17
line busy, 6-16
setting up, 6-18
PRINT REPORT function, 12-5
REPORT function, 12-5
SCANNING MODE function, 12-5
setting up, 12-4
setup summary, 6-19
registering
correcting, 3-16
date and time, 3-13
making corrections, 3-16
sender information, 3-13
sender names, 3-17
unit name, 3-15
STAMP function, 12-5
TONE function, 12-5
pulse dial
setting, 3-10
unit telephone number, 3-14
Index
I-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
regular dialling
Error Report (RX) sample, 14-12
Error Report (TX) sample, 14-9
Group Dial List sample, 14-4
Memory Box Report sample, 14-14
Memory Clear Report sample, 14-17
Multi-transaction Report sample, 14-12
One-touch Speed Dial List 1 sample, 14-3
One-touch Speed Dialling List 2
sample, 14-4
long distance, 6-9
regular transmissionsetting for Coded Speed
Dialling, 4-19
setting for One-touch Speed Dialling, 4-11
Relay Broadcast Report
sample, 14-14
RELAY TX GROUP
setting, 16-18
relaying documents
paper supply source, 16-8
Received Memory Box List sample, 14-16
Relay Broadcast Report sample, 14-14
Sender Name List sample, 14-6
sender names, 14-6
changing relay settings, 9-6
deleting relay group, 9-7
described, 9-2
sending to relay unit, 9-8
sending with speed dialling, 9-9
setting your fax as relay unit, 9-3
summary of settings, 9-4
using RELAY BROADCAST button, 9-10
remote receiving
speed dialling lists, 14-2
User Data List, 14-5
User’s Data List sample, 14-5
RESOLUTION
scan resolution setting, 16-5
setting for sending, 6-5
settings for copying, 5-5
super fine, 16-5
changing ID, 7-8
with extension phone, 7-7
REPLACE CARTRIDGEdisplayed at power
on, 2-28
ultra fine, 16-5
REPORT
PROGRAM button, 12-5
REPORT SETTINGS
RESTRICTIVE CODES
setting, 16-24
RX footer
activity report, 16-8
illustrated, 3-12
confidential RX report, 16-8
described, 16-3
RX PASSWORD
setting, 16-26
listed, 16-7
RX SETTINGS
memory box report, 16-8
print report where, 16-8
RX report, 16-7
described, 16-3
ECM RX, 16-12
listed, 16-12
TX report, 16-7
reports
MAN/AUTO SWITCH, 16-12
MEMORY RX, 16-13
REMOTE RX, 16-13
Activity Management Report sample, 14-8
Activity Report (RX) sample, 14-13
Activity Report (TX) sample, 14-10
Activity Report (TX) with image
sample, 14-11
RX PAGE FOOTER, 16-13
RX START SPEED
setting, 16-26
Activity Report (TX/RX separate)
sample, 14-8
Activity Reports, 14-7
S
Coded Speed Dial List 1 sample, 14-3
Coded Speed Dial List 2 sample, 14-4
Confidential Mailbox List sample, 14-15
Confidential Receive Report sample, 14-13
Department Access Code Report
sample, 14-9
safety
area around fax unit, 2-7
electrical storms, 2-7
handling power cord, 2-7
power cord, 2-8
SCANNING MODE
PROGRAM button, 12-5
I-6
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
search
name/number from directory, 4-31
sending
adjusting scanning settings, 6-4
search buttons
BATCH TX, 16-10
defined, 2-2
cancelling, 6-8
security
confidential document with speed
dialling, 10-9
confidential documents, 10-9
contrast, 6-5
closed network, 13-14
copying, 13-11
Operating fax with restrictions on, 13-9
printing reports, 13-11
restricting fax operation, 13-5
sending document with restriction, 13-9
setting restrictions on use of fax, 13-5
system password, 13-2
turning restrictions off/on, 13-12
using handset (option) with restrictions
on, 13-12
direct sending, 6-13
document from memory box, 8-22
document to relay unit, 9-8
document type, 6-5
document with restrictions on, 13-9
erase failed transmission, 16-10
manual sending, 6-15
memory box, 8-22
send report
memory full, 6-14
See “TX REPORT”, 16-7
send settings
memory sending, 6-11
more than one location, 6-20
polling, 11-13
preparing document, 6-2
QUICK ON-LINE TX, 16-10
re- sending document in memory, 6-17
re-sending to different destination, 8-7
re-sending to same destination, 8-6
regular dialling, 6-7
AUTO REDIAL, 16-10
BATCH TX, 16-10
ECM TX, 16-9
ERASE FAILED TX, 16-10
listed, 16-9
MID PAUSE SET, 16-9
QUICK ON-LINE TX, 16-10
STAMP ACTION (option), 16-11
TIME OUT, 16-11
relaying document with speed dialling, 9-9
resolution, 6-5
sender information
defined, 3-12
selecting sender name, 6-6
sequential broadcasting, 6-20
setting document on fax, 6-3
setting timer, 6-21
registering, 3-13
RX footer, 3-12
RX PAGE FOOTER, 16-13
setting, 3-11
unit name, 16-4
start speed, 16-26
with ITU-T password, 6-24
with ITU-T subaddress, 6-24
sequential broadcasting
sending to more than one location, 6-20
setting up
unit telephone number, 16-4
Sender Name List
sample, 14-6
sender names
assembling fax unit, 2-17
attaching trays, 2-20
changing, 3-18
deleting, 3-19
printing list, 14-6
registering, 3-17
connecting extension phone, 2-22
connecting handset (option), 2-20
connecting telephone line, 2-21
installing toner cartridge, 2-17
loading front paper cassette, 2-25
loading paper, 2-22
selecting before sending, 6-6
sender’s name
setting, 16-4
loading side paper cassette, 2-23
power on, 2-27
removing lock plates, 2-15
removing shipping material, 2-13
Index
I-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
shipping material
T
removing, 2-13
side paper cassette
telephone line
adjusting for paper size, 2-23
inserting in fax unit, 2-25
loading, 2-23
connecting, 2-21
jack required, 2-4
selecting type, 16-6
switching, 3-10
speed dialling
Coded Speed Dialling, 4-5, 4-28
D.T. button registration, 4-4
Group Dialling, 4-5, 4-29
ITU-T subaddress/password, 6-24
lists, 14-2
temperature
fax unit location, 2-3
timer
registering, 3-13
set for polling, 11-5
setting, 16-4
methods, 4-5
One-touch Speed Dialling, 4-5, 4-26
sending confidential documents, 10-9
sending relaying documents, 9-9
using, 4-26
setting for Coded Speed Dialling, 4-17
setting for Group Dialling, 4-24
setting for One-touch Speed Dialling, 4-9
setting for sending, 6-21
TONE
STAMP
PROGRAM button, 12-5
stamp (option)
PROGRAM button, 12-5
tone dial
described, 12-7
setting, 3-10
re-filling ink pad, 15-23
setting, 16-11
setting up, 12-7
toner cartridge
handling, 2-18, 15-17
installing new, 2-17
protecting, 2-8
super fine
setting, 6-5, 16-5
removing seal, 2-18
replacing, 15-14
storing, 15-17, 15-18
transaction history
displaying, 8-3
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
displayed at power on, 2-28
system password
cancelling, 13-3
changing, 13-3
setting, 13-2, 16-24
SYSTEM SETTINGS
DATE SETUP, 16-25
described, 16-3
transaction number
assigned to every transaction, 6-12
defined, 2-2
LCD display, 6-12
receiving, 7-2
DISPLAY LANGUAGE, 16-26
ENERGY SAVER, 16-26
listed, 16-23
transaction history, 8-3
TRANSFER
setting, 16-22
MEMORY LOCK RX, 16-25
PASSWORD (system password), 16-24
PHONE NO. CHECK, 16-26
RESTRICTIVE CODES, 16-24
RX PASSWORD, 16-26
RX RESTRICTION, 16-25
RX START SPEED, 16-26
TX START SPEED, 16-26
transferring document reception
cancelling, 7-17
changing settings, 7-16
setting up, 7-12
summary table of settings, 7-13
turning off, 7-15
turning on, 7-15
turning on/off, 7-15
I-8
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
transmission report
User Data List
See “TX REPORT”, 16-7
transmission speed
printing, 14-5
user data settings
setting for Coded Speed dialling, 4-20
setting for One-touch Speed Dialling, 4-12
troubleshooting
questions and answers, 15-30
TX SETTINGS
summary, 16-3
USER SETTINGS
DATE & TIME, 16-4
DENSITY CONTROL, 16-5
described, 16-3
described, 16-3
listed, 16-4
see “Send Settings”, 16-9
TX START SPEED
OFFHOOK ALARM, 16-6
PROGRAM key, 16-5
R-KEY SETTINGS, 16-6
SCAN RESOLUTION, 16-5
SENDER’S NAME, 16-4
TELEPHONE LINE TYPE, 16-6
TX TERMINAL ID, 16-5
UNIT NAME, 16-4
UNIT TELEPHONE #, 16-4
VOLUME CONTROL, 16-6
User’s Data List
setting, 16-26
U
ultra fine
setting, 6-5, 16-5
unit name
registering, 3-15
unit telephone number
registering, 3-14
unpacking
sample, 14-5
box contents, 2-9, 2-10
Index
I-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I-10
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|